JP6642414B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which electric wiring is arranged without support from a rear case to a moving member (Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-245160 A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the way of wiring.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine in which wiring can be appropriately arranged.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 is a game machine including a movable moving member and a wire connected to the moving member, one end of which is connected to the moving member. A wiring auxiliary member connected to the wiring, at least a part of the wiring is disposed along the wiring auxiliary member, and the wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of constituent parts, and the constituent parts are long and long. A long portion, and a supporting portion formed at at least one end of the long portion and rotatably supporting the components, and at least a part of the long portion extends along the long direction. A pair of side wall portions are provided side by side, and at least one of the side wall portions includes a projecting portion projecting toward the wiring.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a board box.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to appropriately arrange the wiring of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, a control device can be housed inside the board box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the operation unit which disassembled from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b). is there. 15A is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device taken along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device after sliding the moving upper cover member from FIG. It is sectional drawing. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the game board. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17B, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit is virtually changed from FIG. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a main-body member, a shielding member, and a swing member. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swing member. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a first guide arm along line XXVc-XXVc in FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm taken along line XXVd-XXVd in FIG. 25A. (A) is a front view of a 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 2nd guide arm, (c) is a 2nd guide arm in the XXVIc-XXVIc line of FIG. 26D is a sectional view of the second guide arm taken along line XXVId-XXVId in FIG. 26A. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, a 2nd guide arm, and wiring. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 30 is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28. FIG. 33 is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit taken along line XXXV-XXXV in FIG. 32. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XXXVII-XXXVII in FIG. 36. It is a front perspective view of a swing operation unit. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of the swing operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of the oscillating operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the oscillating operation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXIIb in FIG. 42 (a). It is a front view of a swing operation unit. 43A is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member, the driven side arm member, and the first bridging member along the line XXXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member, a driven side arm member, and a 2nd bridge member. (A) is a partial side view of the swing operation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXVa in FIG. 43, and (b) and (c) show that the driven arm member is bent forward from the state of FIG. FIG. 6 is a partial side view of the swinging operation unit, illustrating a state of the swinging operation unit in a time series. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of a driving arm member and a driven arm member taken along the line XXXXIV-XXXXXIV in FIG. 43. FIG. 44 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swinging operation unit along the line XXXXV-XXXXV in FIG. 43. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the swing operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the swing operation unit according to the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation unit along the line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of a compound operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a composite operation unit. It is a rear view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the composite operation unit. It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a composite operation unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the gaming board taken along line LXI-LXI in FIG. 60. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a perspective view of a detachable front locking member. . (A) is a front view of a 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 2nd guide arm, (c) is a 2nd guide arm in the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of FIG. FIG. (A) and (b) are front views of a first guide arm and a second guide arm of the wiring guide arm, and (c) is a first view of the wiring guide arm along the line LXIVc-LXIVc in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a guide arm and a 2nd guide arm.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination units 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display device unit 80 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. The first prize port 64, the second prize port 640, and the variable prize apparatus 330 are formed in the lower panel unit 300 which is fitted into a receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 may aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed. The details of the variable prize device 330 (see FIG. 11) that opens and closes the specific prize port 65a will be described later, but in brief, the specific prize port 65a is moved by sliding the movable upper cover member 332 of the variable prize device 330. It is opened and closed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 314. The out opening 314 is provided in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 433, 462, 551 and solenoid 474.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, a description will be given of a structure in which the units 400 and 500 are housed in the rear case 210.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 when the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall 211 and the outer wall 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 211. And a rear case 210 formed in a box shape. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The left, right, and upper outer wall portions 212 each include an intermediate wall portion 212a formed in the middle in the front-rear direction and parallel to the bottom wall portion 211, and a fastening portion 212b capable of fastening a member to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the near side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 extends from the end opposite to the opening 211a of the intermediate wall portion 212a, and on the far side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 is It extends from the end of the side 212a adjacent to the opening 211a.

  The holding and fixing portion 446 and the fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and the guide plate 424 is fixed to the fastening portion 212b formed on the upper middle wall portion 212a. Are fastened and fixed.

  Here, the fixing plate 461 is a member that supports a drive motor 462 that generates a driving force for driving the composite operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member that fixes one end of the biasing spring 445, and the guide plate 424. Is a member for guiding the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the composite operation unit 400. In other words, none of these is a production part directly visible to the player, but a part having an auxiliary role of production for generating a driving force for the operation of the combined operation unit 400 or guiding the operation. .

  By arranging the fixing plate 461, the holding and fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 having such a role near the front side of the rear case 210, a space near the rear side of the rear case 210 can be opened. By using the vacant space on the rear side as a space for retreating a portion that is actually visually recognized by the player, such as the shielding member 420, the constituent members of the composite operation unit 400 can be stacked back and forth, and the opening 211a The width required for retracting the composite operation unit 400 to the outside of the unit can be reduced. Therefore, the formation width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be reduced. Thereby, the opening 211a can be enlarged, and the formation range of the third symbol display device 81 can be enlarged.

  In the operation unit 200, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are respectively housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is disposed on the left, right, and upper portions of a region formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and the swing operation unit 500 is provided inside the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. It is disposed below the area formed by the side surface (see FIG. 5).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, an outline of operation modes of the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIG. 5 and FIG.

  7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhang position, FIG. 8 shows a state in which the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhang position, and FIG. The state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 are arranged at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the combined operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. That is, at the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . The composite operation unit 400 is a unit in which the shielding member 420 performs two types of operations (sliding operation and swinging operation) having different movement modes by sliding the main body member 410 as described later.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised, and the moving member 540 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . The moving members 540 are formed as a pair of left and right, and at the overhang position shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, both the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be arranged at the extended position. In this case, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative member (partially overlapped in a front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the width outside the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be improved. In addition, since the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 project toward the center of the opening 211a in different directions (downward and upward), for example, compared with a case where all the movable members extend in the same direction, The distance that each member moves from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened. Accordingly, when the moving speeds of the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are the same, the period for moving from the retreat position to the overhang position can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 18, the board lower unit 300 disposed below the game board 13 will be described. 10 and 11 are exploded front perspective views of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300. Note that FIG. 10 shows a state where only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game plate 13, and FIGS. 11 and 12 show that the front unit 310 and the variable winning device 330 of the lower panel unit 300 are further divided from FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. In addition, for easy understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a specific winning opening 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed in a curved shape that is convex downward, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is smaller than when the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line extending in the left-right direction. Can be lowered downward. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a has an upper side formed by the movable upper lid member 332, a lower side formed by the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and left and right sides formed by left and right walls of the opening upper portion 313. .

  As will be described later, the specific winning port 65a is switched between the closed state and the open state by sliding the movable upper lid member 332 back and forth. Times (15 rounds) can be repeated.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the lower panel unit 300 is a unit that forms an out port 314 from which a ball is discharged and a specific winning port 65 a, and is a receiving hole that is formed in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. The front unit 310 is fitted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed, the front plate member 320 is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and has a ball path formed on the back side, and the receiving opening 60a. And a variable winning device 330 having a movable upper lid member 332 that is fitted and fastened and fixed from the rear side and changes the flowing direction of the ball.

  The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a ball can flow down the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members is opened and closed right and left at the front center of the main body plate portion 311. A plate-like inclined plate portion 312 protruding forward from the left and right upper portions of the main body plate portion 311; an upper opening portion 313 recessed upward from a lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311; And a pair of out ports 314 that are bored in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides of the part 313 and that discharge the ball out of the game area.

  The main body plate portion 311 is formed in a front-rear direction at a position surrounded by a first winning opening lower side 311a that is formed above the electric accessory 640a and forms a lower side of the first winning opening 64 and a pair of members of the electric accessory 640a. A second winning opening 640 provided, a light irradiating device 311b arranged below the second winning opening 640 to illuminate the front side of the second winning opening 640, and a rib-shaped front outside the out opening 314. And a ball-flowing rib 311c protruding from the main body.

  The light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320, and is directed upward (to the second winning opening 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning opening 640. The LED member is irradiated with light.

  The ball flowing rib 311c is for adjusting the flowing direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  The inclined plate portion 312 is formed so that the ball can roll on the upper side surface, is disposed on the left and right of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as it approaches the electric accessory 640a. Accordingly, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state in which the electric accessory 640a is tilted right and left, it is possible to cause the ball flowing down by rolling the inclined plate portion 312 to win the second winning opening 640 with a high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state in which it stands up, the ball that is rolled down by falling on the inclined plate portion 312 can drop with high probability to the front side of the upper opening portion 313.

  The upper opening portion 313 is formed to be inclined upward toward the left and right center. Here, by setting the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the vertical width of the left and right walls of the upper opening portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right walls of the specific winning opening 65a). ) Can be set to a length less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, it is difficult to make the ball win from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, but the ball flows down to the center of the game board 13 along the inner rail 61, and the center of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-right direction. , The game can be continued.

  Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific winning opening 65a are parallel planes (planes extending in the left-right direction), until the straight line intersecting with the inner rail 61 becomes the same as the length of the lower surface of the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to arrange the specific winning opening 65a so as to rise from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a becomes higher.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be curved similarly to the lower surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to arrange the specific winning opening 65a upward. Can be arranged.

  Further, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right end portions, the ball is moved to the specific winning opening 65a as compared with a case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left and right direction. Can be lowered downward. Thereby, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

  The out opening 314 is formed as a pair on the left and right of the upper opening 313, and the lower side of the out opening 314 is disposed below the upper and lower ends of the upper opening 313, and the upper side of the out opening 314 is disposed above. You. That is, the opening upper portion 313 is formed below the out opening 314. Thereby, the arrangement of the variable winning device 330 described later can be lowered, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered. Even in such an arrangement, in the present embodiment, the sphere flows down the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332 which has an upper surface substantially the same as the shape of the upper opening portion 313 and is slid in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 17), so that the game can be continued.

  The front plate member 320 is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, is disposed on the front side of the front unit 310, and is formed so that a sphere can flow between itself and the main body plate portion 311. Winning plate front portion 322 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 321 and guiding the ball to the lower side 311a of the first winning opening, and disposed below the electric accessory 640a. The lower part 323 of the electrically driven accessory, the lower plate 324 of the outer opening arranged along the lower surface of the outlet 314, and the rear side protruding from the main body plate 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. And a ball feeder 325.

  The main body plate portion 321 includes a spherical flow rib 321a protruding in the form of a rib on the rear side outside the lower plate 324. The ball running rib 321a adjusts the flowing direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and its details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes a housing recess 323a that is a horizontally long recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a.

  The outer mouth lower plate 324 is formed with thin ribs extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. In addition, the out mouth lower plate 324 includes a step portion 324a projecting upward at left and right inner ends. Due to the unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out mouth lower plate 324, the flowing ball can be decelerated. The rib formed on the lower plate 324 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear side. Thus, the speed at which the flowing ball is discharged to the out port 314 can be improved.

  Since the above-mentioned inclined plate portion 312 is formed right above the lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), the ball falling after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 is directed toward the lower plate 324. Falling is suppressed. In other words, the ball that falls after rolling on the inclined plate portion 312 falls inside the left and right sides of the pair of out-opening lower plates 324 (position where the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed), or Either it falls to the outer end (near the ball-flowing rib 321a and at the boundary between the rib formation range and the rail on which the ball flows). These are both out of the rib formation range. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling from a high place on the lower plate 324 of the outer opening, and to improve the durability of the lower plate 324 of the outer opening.

  The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out opening 314 and the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball flowing down from the left and right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the out opening lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. Thus, it is prevented from flowing down to the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17). That is, the ball that flows down from the left and right and flows down the upper side surface of the lower plate 324 is guided exclusively to the outlet 314.

  The ball feeder 325 mainly includes a back side surface 325a formed on the back side, and left and right side surfaces 325b connected to the back side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

  The rear side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the rear side, and the left and right side surface 325b is inclined toward the center toward the rear side. Thereby, the falling direction of the sphere that has reached the sphere feeding part 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and prevent a so-called over winning.

  Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (a) is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 that forms a skeleton, and a movable upper lid member 332 that is inserted through the main body member 331 from the front and is formed to be slidable in the front-rear direction. A rear lid member 334 that accommodates a solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the movable upper lid member 332 and a lever member 334 b that is swung by the solenoid 333 and that is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the main body member 331. And mainly comprising.

  The main body member 331 is provided with a deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted, a lower passage 331b through which a ball won at the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and is disposed below the lower passage 331b and directed upward. Mainly includes a light irradiation device 331c that irradiates light, and a back side housing portion 331d that is a recess formed by being recessed toward the front side on the back side and houses the solenoid 333, the lever member 334b, and the like. .

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the deformed through-hole 331a is a through-hole formed along the shape of the movable upper lid member 332, and is a front side for accommodating the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly has an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 for accommodating the rear plate 332b.

  The front opening 331a1 is a pentagon-shaped dent having a lower side extending horizontally in a front view, being inclined upward as the upper side approaches the center, and having left and right sides extending vertically.

  The rear opening 331a2 is an opening formed by cutting off the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 from the center on the rear side of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the front opening 331a are not formed in the front-rear direction but formed at the surface position. Thereby, the movable upper lid member 332 can be smoothly guided.

  The lower passage 331b is formed as a pair of left and right so as to allow a ball to pass therethrough (see FIG. 18A), and is formed so as to protrude below the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Is provided (see FIG. 15B).

  The light irradiation device 331c is a device for illuminating the lower passage 331b, the plate-shaped portion 332a1, and the like with light, and is disposed below the inner rail 61 (below the receiving opening 60a). Thus, since the devices and the like required for the light irradiation device 331c can be disposed below the inner rail 61, a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

  The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that irradiates light. The light irradiation part 331c1 is formed as a pair of right and left directly below the lower passage 331b, and irradiates light upward.

  The back side housing portion 331d communicates with the front opening portion 331a1 across the rear opening portion 331a2.

  The moving upper cover member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 332a housed in the front opening 331a1, a rear plate portion 332b housed in the rear opening 331a2. A central rib 332c protruding downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connection hole 332d formed in a vertical direction at a rear end of the rear plate portion 332b. Prepare mainly.

  The front-side plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-like portion 332a1 formed in a manner to rise and incline toward the center in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening portion 331a1, and is formed in the vertical direction of the plate-like portion 332a1. And a guide rib 332a3 that extends downward in the left-right end of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The plate-shaped portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f which is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear side as it goes downward (see FIG. 16) and is depressed toward the rear side as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction. Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be concave toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, the ball can flow toward the center when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In addition, it is possible to prevent the sliding operation of the movable upper lid member 332 from being hindered by the ball.

  Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion for reflecting light as described later, in order to effectively reflect light, a metal film is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished. You may. In this embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

  The guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 in the assembled state (see FIG. 15), and is in contact with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the movable upper lid member 332 in the left-right direction during the sliding movement.

  The center rib 332c is formed at a bent portion of the front plate portion 332a formed by bending a plate shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the front side plate part 332a can be improved. Further, when the movable upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the movable upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in the retracted state), the movable upper lid member 332 is fixed to the back side of the upper opening portion 313. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the movable upper cover member 332 from malfunctioning due to the collision between the center rib 332c and the ball.

  The connection hole 332d is a through hole through which the connection portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted and the displacement due to the swing of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the movable upper cover member 332 (see FIG. 16).

  The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a serving as a driving source, and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b disposed below the main body 333a and vertically moved below the lever member 334b.

  The rear cover member 334 mainly includes a plate-shaped main body portion 334a, and a lever member 334b pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a and having a front end formed to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  The lever member 334b includes a main body 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shafts 334b2 protruding in the left and right directions at the lower end of the main body 334b1 in a columnar shape and supported by the main body 334a. A lower claw portion 334b3 that extends below the main body portion 334b1 at a substantially intermediate position between the pair of shaft portions 334b2 and is formed to be able to accommodate the hook-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and the upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1. And a connection portion 334b4 bulging into a cylindrical shape.

  Next, the sliding movement of the movable upper cover member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 330 along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B slides the moving upper cover member 332 from the state of FIG. 16A. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning device 330 after it is made to perform. FIG. 16A illustrates a retracted state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed rearward, and FIG. 16B illustrates a projecting state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed forward, and FIG. The illustration of the center rib 332c is partially omitted in order to facilitate understanding of the path E1. 16 (a) and 16 (b), the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is disposed upward, and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can be won (open state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the extended state, the hook member 333b is pressed downward, whereby the lever member 334b is tilted forward about the shaft portion 334b2, and The movable upper lid member 332 is slid toward the front side while being in contact with the side surface of the side housing portion 331b. In this state, the ball cannot be won (closed state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  In this case, the back side surface of the lower end of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swing of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is arranged in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b). Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a path of light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 along the path E1. I do. At this time, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined to the rear side as going downward, the light emitted from below and reaching the front inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize as if the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the movable upper lid member 332 is emitting light. In addition, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected to the projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be noticed. Thereby, the performance ability of the movable upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

  Here, when disposing an LED or the like on the movable upper lid member 332 to cause the movable upper lid member 332 to emit light, the movable upper lid member 332 may be enlarged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not provided on the movable upper lid member 332, it is possible to improve the performance of the movable upper lid member 332 as an effect portion while suppressing the movable upper lid member 332 from being enlarged. Can be.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the extended state, the light is irradiated upward along the path E2 from the light irradiation unit 331 c 1, and the light traveling toward the front inclined side surface 332 a 1 f is transmitted to the inner rail 61. Does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate portion 332a1. In this case, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-shaped part 332a1 of the front plate part 332a and only transmits as it is, so the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 Is visually recognized by the player as dark.

  That is, depending on whether the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the extended state, whether or not the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes. Whether the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is visually recognized changes. Therefore, by confirming the brightness state of the light projecting range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320, it can be confirmed whether a ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a.

  Therefore, even when the movable upper lid member 332 slides back and forth as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to grasp a change in the state of the movable upper lid member 332 in a front view (FIGS. 17A and 17B). )), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a by a change in the brightness of the projection range E0.

  Here, the movable upper lid member 332 operates to form a closed state in which the ball is prevented from passing through the specific winning opening 65a and an open state in which the ball is allowed to pass through the specific winning opening 65a ( Only the forward / backward slide movement) changes the brightness state of the projection range E0. In other words, the state of the light projecting range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the movable upper lid member 332 to continue the game, so that an additional mechanism is not required. That is, the movable upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of producing an effect using the light emitted from the light emitting unit 331c1.

  When the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b and crosses the path E1, the light emitted from the light irradiating unit 331c may be reflected by the sphere to produce an effect. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 16A and 17B) can be brightly illuminated in a front view.

  With reference to FIG. 17, a description will be given of the flow of the ball when the movable upper lid member 332 forms the extended state and when the movable upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state. FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B are partial front views of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 17A illustrates a case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms an extended state (see FIG. 16B), and FIG. 17B illustrates a case where the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (FIG. 16B). 17 (a) is shown. In FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is shown in imaginary lines. 17 (a) and 17 (b), whether or not the movable upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of hatching. That is, in FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b), the shaded portion is in contact with the front plate member 320 or the front plate is so large that it blocks the passage of a sphere between the front plate member 320 and the front plate member 320. This is a portion close to the member 320.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the sphere that falls on the route C2 flows down along the upper side surface of the movable upper cover member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 may fall down due to the weight of the ball, and when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the step portion 324a, the ball is discharged to the out port 314. You will not be able to play games.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable upper lid member 332 has a length several times (about four times as long as that shown in FIG. 16 (b)) the length protruding to the front side of the modified through hole 331a. It is accommodated in the modified through-hole 331a, and is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the modified through-hole 331a in the up-down direction in the front-rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the movable upper lid member 332 and the deformed through-hole 331a, it is possible to suppress the movable upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the movable upper lid member 332. Thus, the left and right ends of the movable upper lid member 332 can be formed at the same level as the step 324a, and the nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered. The rim can be lowered downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (b), when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the ball can flow down to the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the ball rolling on the route C1 from the left and right along the inner rail 61 collides with the step portion 324a and is discharged to the out opening 314, so that the ball falling on the route C2 from above toward the specific winning opening 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the movable upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the out port 314 to which the ball falling from the step portion 324a reaches can also be lowered.

  In this case, it is difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in the present embodiment, the ball is blocked by the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a rolls toward the center of the game area along the inner rail 61 by gravity. The ball is moved to the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed to be inclined backward (see FIG. 16), the ball can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17).

  Thereby, the movable upper lid member 332 forming the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is separated upward from the inner rail 61 at least in the vicinity of the center of the game area (near the inner rail 61 being the lowest) or more than the diameter of the ball. Since it is sufficient, the disposition position of the movable upper lid member 332 can be lowered. Therefore, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered in comparison with the case where it is necessary to be separated upward from the inner rail 61 more than the diameter of the ball at a position other than the vicinity of the center of the inner rail 61. Thereby, a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a description will be given of the function of the ball-flowing ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feeding portion 325 and the fact that light is collected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17B, and FIG. 18B is a lower panel unit 300 taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17A. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18B.

  In FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the ball is described by paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the movable upper lid member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by imaginary lines. The moving upper lid member 332 is located on the near side (upper side in FIG. 17B) with respect to the cross section in FIG. 18A, and is not actually visible. FIG. 18 (a) is shown by an imaginary line in a state where the positions (when viewed in the vertical direction) match. 18B and FIG. 18C, three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

  The path of a sphere that is rolled from the left and right along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) and discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18 (a), a sphere rolling from the left / right direction toward the center of FIG. 18 (a) abuts on at least one of the sphere running rib 311c or the sphere running rib 321a. That is, the sphere rolling while abutting on the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts against the sphere running rib 311c, and the sphere rolling while abutting on the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a sphere running rib. 321a.

  Here, when the sphere flows and abuts against the rib 311c, the velocity direction of the sphere is directed in a direction along the path C1a, and then abuts on the sphere flowing rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the ball rolls while abutting on the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or rolls while abutting on the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling ball is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

  By causing the ball rolling along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) to flow into contact with the rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the velocity of the ball can be directed to the rear side (upward in FIG. 18A) before the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 to when the ball is discharged from the game area can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. At the same time, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. Thereby, when the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10) and the out opening 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered below the game area.

  The case where the ball falls between the stepped portions 324a arranged in a pair on the left and right will be described. In this case, the ball that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the ball abuts on the left and right side surfaces 325b of the ball feed portion 325, so that the speed direction of the ball is along the path C2a. Change. Thereby, the ball can be prevented from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10), so that over winning can be suppressed.

  When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere blocks the light, so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) based on whether the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is visually recognized or dark. it can.

  Thus, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is disposed in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to visually recognize. Also, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a by the change in the brightness of the light projecting range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning opening 65a obliquely from above to confirm that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, compared to the case where the ball flows down in the light traveling direction (see FIG. 18C) or the case where the ball flows down in the light irradiation direction, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. The period in which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks light can be shortened. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is viewed brightly, and it is possible to ensure the performance of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Thereafter, around the time when the ball passes through the front end of the lower passage 331b (the right side in FIG. 18B), the light is no longer blocked by the ball (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

  In this case, even if the balls continue to flow down the lower passage 331b, the path E1 is shielded for each ball. Therefore, the change in the brightness of the light projecting range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is reduced. By confirming, it is possible to confirm the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the light path E3 and the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are close to parallel, the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 18C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, light is no longer blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until then, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

  In this case, when the spheres continue to flow down the lower passage 331b, the first sphere (the sphere on the left side in FIG. 18C) blocks the light path E3 as long as the sphere is arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first ball falls downward from the rear end portion of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 18C), the light path is changed to the second ball (right side ball in FIG. 18C). E3 is blocked. In addition, when the second ball (the third ball) enters the lower passage 331b when the second ball falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b, a light path is formed on the lower ball 331b. E3 is blocked. As described above, the sphere continues to shield the light path E3, and the sphere is always visually recognized as dark while flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of times that light is visually recognized or darkly changed does not always match the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a does not necessarily match. Confirmation becomes difficult. In contrast, the present embodiment has the advantages described above.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be depressed toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, so that the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiation units 331c1 is emitted by the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is focused on the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1, and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is disposed on the front side of the movable upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visually recognized through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of the light emitting element such as the LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting elements that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 are limited.

  On the other hand, the front inclined side surfaces 332a1f converge the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 to the center of the front plate member 320. The intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be improved. Therefore, the degree of freedom in selecting a light-emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation section 331c1 can be improved (a light-emitting element with low light intensity can be selected).

  In addition, since the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is partially overlapped and visible when viewed from the front (see FIG. 17B), by making the colors of the light different from each other, the pair of light irradiation Light of a total of three colors, that is, the color of the light emitted from the unit 331c1 and the color obtained by combining them, can be visually recognized in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the light emitted from each of the pair of light emitting units 331c1 is shielded by the sphere rolling along the path C2a independently (see FIG. 18), at the timing when the sphere shields the light, The color of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be variously switched.

  For example, in FIG. 18, a case is considered in which “blue” light is emitted from the right light irradiation unit 331c1 and “red” light is emitted from the left light irradiation unit 331c1. In this case, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light is emitted in the order of “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red” from the right in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B). Is visually recognized.

  In this case, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 and blocks the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the light of the “blue” color is blocked. Only the "red" light is visible.

  On the other hand, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 and blocks the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the light of “red” is blocked. Only "blue" light is visible.

  In this way, the manner in which light is visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is blocked. Since the change in the light mode is caused by a ball flowing down the game area along a random route while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the light mode can be generated at random timing. That is, as compared with a case where the change in the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is caused by electronic control, a more random effect can be performed, and the effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a U-shape as viewed from above, but may be formed in a parabolic shape as viewed from above from the viewpoint of condensing light.

  Next, the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. 19 and 20 illustrate a state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position, and the drive motor 462 and the fixed plate 461 are not illustrated. In the composite operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210.

  FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is an exploded rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the composite operation unit 400 has a horizontally-long rectangular main body member 410 which can be slid vertically, and one end portion of which can be guided at both left and right ends of the main body member 410. A shielding member 420 that is a pair of members connected to each other and the other ends of which are pivotally supported with each other; a swing member 430 that is swingably disposed on the center front side of the body member 410; A pair of leg members 440 that are fastened and fixed to both ends and extend in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 in which a guide hole 452 for guiding the leg member 440 is formed, and a driving force required to move the leg member 440. A driving device 460 to be generated, a rear upper plate 470 fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and a wiring for connecting the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410 to accommodate wiring therein. Composed mainly comprises a guide arm 480, a.

  FIG. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the oscillating member 430, and FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the oscillating member 430.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the main body member 410 has a plate-shaped base member 411 formed to be long in the left-right direction, and is provided in both left and right end portions of the base member 411 in the front-rear direction, and A long hole-shaped leg insertion hole 412 that extends, and a direction that is disposed inside the leg insertion hole 412 of the base member 411 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction and rises and leans toward the left-right center axis of the base member 411. And a columnar member extending from the upper end of the base member 411 to the front side, and one end of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported. An arm shaft support portion 414, a holding portion 415 extending upward from the center in the left-right direction of the base member 411 and having a hook-like tip, and a swing member 430 provided as a pair at a lower end portion of the base member 411. Shaft support hole 431a A supporting portion 416 to be supported, a photosensor 417 disposed in front of the base member 411 to detect the sensor passage portion 435d of the swing member 430, a decorative plate portion 418 formed in a substantially semicircular shape in a front view, Mainly equipped.

  The base member 411 has a shape in which a central portion in the left-right direction hangs downward from both left and right end portions. Thereby, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be disposed in the space (see FIG. 29).

  The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in a long hole shape, and the rotation of the leg member 440 with respect to the base member 411 is suppressed by inserting the connection fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440. You. Thereby, the posture of the leg member 440 and the main body member 410 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole 413 is an elongated hole through which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and slid, and has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. Above the guide hole 413, there is provided a front cover 413a which covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and has a side facing the guide hole 413 formed along the upper side of the guide hole 413. On the side, a support plate 413b, which is a plate-like portion protruding from the front side of the base member 411 and rising and inclined along the guide hole 413, is provided.

  The front end of the support plate 413b is in contact with the rear surface of the swing base member 421. Accordingly, since the swinging of the swing base member 421 is suppressed by the support plate 413b, the posture during the movement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized.

  The arm shaft support portion 414 is disposed on the left side in front view of the center portion of the base member 411. More specifically, the arm shaft support portion 414 is disposed at an intermediate portion between a portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 starts to drop and a central portion in the left-right direction. Is done. The end (lower end) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480 is supported by the arm shaft support 414, and a collar member is provided at the tip of the arm shaft support 414. Fastened and fixed.

  The holding portion 415 is a portion that is hooked on a slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) disposed on the rear upper plate 470. That is, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end of the slide lever 473 and the lower end of the hook-shaped portion of the holding portion 415 are in contact with each other, The downward movement of the main body member 410 is restricted. An inclined surface 415a is formed on the upper surface of the hook-shaped tip. The inclined surface 415a does not hinder the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position with the slide lever 473 extended.

  The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion that is visually recognized in a front view together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is arranged at the extended position, and in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position (FIG. 29), which is the portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

  The shielding member 420 includes a swing base member 421 formed in such a manner that ends of a pair of plate members are pivotally supported, and a decorative member whose upper end is fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421. 422, a pair of connecting members 423 whose one end is pivotally supported coaxially with the pivot position of the swing base member 421, and a guide on which the other end of the connecting member 423 is pivotally supported. And a guide plate 424 formed with a hole 424b and fastened to the upper end of the rear case 210 on the front side.

  The swing base member 421 is formed of a pair of plate-shaped members 421 a formed in a substantially arc shape, and is a swing shaft that is coaxially supported by a shaft support hole 423 d formed at one end of the connection member 423. It mainly includes a hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c that are inserted and guided in the guide holes 413 of the main body member 410, and a contact plate 421d that protrudes from the rear side and contacts the upper surface of the main body member 410. .

  The swing shaft hole 421b is a portion that serves as a swing shaft of the pair of plate members 421a, while a shaft support rod 423c inserted through one end of the connection member 423 is penetrated and supported by the connection member 423. It is.

  Since the insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, the left and right ends of the shielding member 420 are moved as the main body member 410 is moved downward from the intermediate position (see FIG. 30). It is moved close to the center in the left-right direction.

  The contact plate 421d is a curved surface projecting rearward from the plate-shaped member 421a, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. As a result, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d abut on each other at the retracted position.

  The decorative member 422 includes a pair of thick portions 422a disposed on the front side of the swing base member 421, and a portion formed below the swing base member 421 in a front view, and a lower end portion. And a hanging portion 422b formed to be curved backward from the swing base member 421.

  The hanging portion 422 b is disposed closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

  The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of rod members 423a bent in a bent shape in a bent portion 423b, and includes a pivot rod 423c. One end of the rod member 423a has a pivot rod 423c. A shaft support hole 423d through which is inserted is formed, and a slide shaft portion 423e that is inserted into and guided by the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is formed at the other end of the rod member 423a.

  The bent portion 423b is bent above a straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bent portion 423b is disposed farther from the swing base member 421 than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space can be secured between the swing base member 421 and the connection member 423, and the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a cylindrical portion inserted into the guide hole 424b, and a disk-shaped collar member fastened and fixed to the tip of the cylindrical portion.

  The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and a pair of elongated holes 424b that are formed in the left and right ends of the base plate 424a in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction. , Mainly comprising. A pair of guide holes 424b are formed at the same height.

  The guide hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, the direction along the upper outer edge of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. Therefore, the width required for the guide plate 424 for guiding the connecting member 423 can be suppressed. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be arranged at a position further away from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed larger accordingly.

  The oscillating member 430 is a member pivotally supported by the shaft supporting portion 416, and includes a main body member 431 that is oscillated and a base that is disposed so as to protrude toward the front side of the center of the base member 411. A member 432, a drive motor 433 fastened and fixed to the base member 432 to generate a driving force for driving the main body member 431, a drive gear 434 supported by the drive motor 433, and meshed with the drive gear 434. A transmission gear 435 pivotally supported above the base member 432 with respect to the drive gear 434, and a connection member 436 connecting the connection shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the connection shaft 431b of the main body member 431. Prepare for.

  The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative portion is formed on the front side, and has a shaft support hole 431a that is bored in the left-right direction below both ends in the left-right direction on the back side and through which the shaft support portion 416 is inserted. And a connection shaft 431b which is disposed at the center on the side and which is rotatably supported at one end of the connection member 436.

  The connecting shaft 431b is disposed on the rear side of the main body member 431 at a position closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a. Thereby, the moving width of the upper end of the main body member 431 can be made larger than the moving width in which the connecting member 436 is actually moved back and forth.

  The transmission gear 435 is supported by the base member 432 and extends substantially half way around the main body 435a where a gear meshed with the drive gear 434 is formed, and extends to the opposite side of the gear formed on the main body 435a. Overhang 435b, a columnar connecting shaft 435c protruding rightward from the front end of the overhang 435b in front view, and formed along the left front side of the overhang 435b. And a sensor passage portion 435d (see FIG. 34), which is formed in a fan shape when viewed in the left-right direction and whose peripheral portion passes through the photosensor 417.

  The connecting member 436 is a rod-shaped member having holes parallel to each other at both ends. The connecting member 436 has a one-side connecting hole 436a formed at one end and supported by the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431. And a second connection hole 436b that is bored at the other end and is supported by the connection shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435.

  Returning to FIG. 21 and FIG. The arm member 440 has a long plate-shaped main body 441 in which a pair extends in the vertical direction, and a cross section protruding from the upper end of the main body 441 to the front side is formed in an elongated hole shape that is long in the vertical direction. A pair of insertion shaft portions 443 projecting rearward from upper and lower ends of the main body portion 441 and inserted through the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and a front side from the lower end portion of the main body portion 441. A locking portion 444 that protrudes from the rear case 210 and a second end of the biasing spring 445 whose one end is locked to the locking portion 444 and one end of the biasing spring 445 is locked to the locking portion 444. And a holding / fixing portion 446 fastened and fixed to the front side.

  The main body portion 441 has a rack gear 441a engraved on a side surface facing the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441a is meshed with the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460. The force is transmitted to the leg member 440.

  The insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long hole shape and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the vertically extending guide member 450, so that the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. Can be. Further, since the insertion shaft portion 443 is formed as a pair of upper and lower portions, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

  The biasing spring 445 generates a biasing force for moving the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the biasing spring 445 functions as a fixed-side end locked by the holding and fixing portion 446, and one end functions as a moving-side end locked by the locking portion 444.

  The guide member 450 includes a main body member 451 which is a vertically long plate member arranged in a pair of left and right, and a long hole formed in the main body member 451 in a pair of upper and lower sides in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , A pair of fixing portions 453 for fixing the driving device 460 at the center in the vertical direction of the main body member 451, and the leg member 440 is disposed on the front side of the upper end of the main body member 451 and the leg member 440 is in the retracted position ( (See FIG. 19) and a cover member 454 arranged on the front side of the leg member 440.

  The driving device 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step backward, the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixing portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side is the fastening portion 212b ( Mainly includes a fixing plate 461 fixed to the fixing plate 461, a driving motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 461, and a driving gear 463 supported by the driving motor 462.

  Since the fixing plate 461 has a shape in which the side away from the main body member 410 is raised by one step toward the front side, a gap surrounded by the rear case 210 and the fixing plate 461 may be formed on the side away from the main body member 410. it can. Here, when the urging springs 445 are arranged on the left and right sides of the leg member 440, the width of the leg members 440 including the urging springs 4454 in the left-right direction is increased, and thus the left-right width of the opening 211a is reduced. I was In the present embodiment, the biasing spring 445 can be disposed in a gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the rear case 210 and the fixing plate 461, and the right and left sides of the leg member 440 are correspondingly arranged. Space in the direction can be suppressed.

  The rear upper plate 470 is a member fastened and fixed to a bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and includes a plate-shaped main body portion 471 and the main body portion 471. A column-shaped shaft support portion 472 protruding from the upper left end portion to the front side in front view, a slide lever 473 elongated in the left-right direction provided in the center of the main body portion 471, and the slide lever 473 is provided in the left-right direction. And a front cover 475 fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to cover the front side of the slide lever 473.

  The shaft support portion 472 is a portion on which the one-side tubular portion 481b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is supported, and a collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip. The wiring to be introduced into the main body member 410 is disposed so as to pass through the vicinity of the shaft support 472.

  The slide lever 473 is a member that is in contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 in a state where the main body member 410 is located at the retracted position (see FIG. 29), and prevents the main body member 410 from moving downward. is there. Note that an inclined surface 473a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. The contact between the inclined surface 473a and the inclined surface 415a of the main body member 410 makes it possible to suppress the resistance generated between the contact surfaces.

  The overhang of the slide lever 473 is changed depending on whether or not electricity is conducted to the solenoid 474. For example, when the slide lever 473 projects leftward when viewed from the front due to conduction of electricity, the slide lever 473 abuts on the lower surface of the holding portion 415 when the electricity is conducted, and the main body member 410 Is prevented from moving downward (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 does not come into contact with the holding portion 415, and the main body member 410 can be moved downward.

  Here, it is conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven as the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position, and the slide lever 473 comes into contact with the holding portion 415. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 cannot be released until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473 after the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. Therefore, when changing the operation of the driving device 460 by detecting the arrangement of the main body member 410, it is necessary to control the driving device 460 in consideration of the time for the solenoid 474 to move the slide lever 473, which is difficult to control. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is arranged to face the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward with the slide lever 473 extended (FIG. 31). ), And the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is located at the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 projects again, and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever The upper surface of the 473 is in contact with the upper surface (see FIG. 29). Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever in the extended state, the downward movement after the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position can be prevented. Therefore, control of the driving device 460 becomes easy.

  The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475 a, which is a concave groove for guiding the slide lever 473, is formed along the left-right direction on the back surface. The slide groove 475 a of the front cover 475 causes the slide lever 473 to slide. Vertical displacement during movement is suppressed.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is formed of a resin material, and is a movable mechanism that guides the wiring W from the rear upper plate 470 fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 to the main body member 410. A first guide arm 481 in which one side cylindrical portion 481b to be formed is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 472, and a second guide arm 482 in which the other end of the first guide arm 481 is pivotally supported at one end. And a third guide arm 483 that pivotally supports the other end of the second guide arm 482 at one end and the other end is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support 414.

  Here, the wiring W is an electric wiring (for example, a flat harness) formed in a belt shape (widely formed in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 27). The length of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than the diameter of the collar member C than the first guide arm 481, and the length of the third guide arm 483 is longer than that of the second guide arm 482. Is shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is configured to be capable of housing the wiring W therein, and is a member that prevents the wiring W from being broken and disconnected. Accordingly, it is not necessary to arrange the wiring W introduced into the main body member 410 through the leg member 440, and it is possible to suppress a space for disposing the leg member 440. Therefore, the opening 211a can be enlarged in the left-right direction.

  Next, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the third guide arm 483 is configured as a technical idea including the ones described for the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the first guide arm 481, FIG. 25B is a bottom view of the first guide arm 481, and FIG. 25C is XXVc of FIG. FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along line XXVc. FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along line XXVd-XXVd in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25A to 25D, the first guide arm 481 includes a plate-shaped arm portion 481a formed in a long plate shape, and a left end of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in a front view. The shaft is disposed on a vertical line on the lower bottom surface (the lower side surface in FIG. 25A) of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the one-side cylindrical portion 481b extending in the front-rear direction, and the plate-shaped arm portion At the end opposite to the one-side tubular portion 481b among the ends of the one-side tubular portion 481a, an axis is arranged on a vertical line on the lower bottom surface of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the other-side tubular portion extending in the front-rear direction. 481c, an attachment portion 481d formed in a plate shape at a predetermined interval above the plate arm portion 481a, a bottom portion 481e connecting the plate arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d on the back side, and an attachment portion 481d. Front locking portion 481 extending from the front side surface to plate-shaped arm portion 481a And, mainly includes the.

  The wiring W is inserted through the inside of the concave cross section formed by the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, the attachment portion 481d, and the bottom portion 481e (see FIG. 27). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the wiring W from being rubbed with other members or being sandwiched by other members.

  The plate-shaped arm portion 481a has a cutout portion 481a1 formed at a portion opposed to the front locking portion 481f, and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a has a reduced thickness at the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed. .

  The cutout portion 481a1 is a depression formed in the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in a shape slightly larger than the front locking portion 481f in a front view, and is formed across the width of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. Note that the formation of the bottom portion 481e is omitted in the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed (the bottom portion 481e is formed to penetrate).

  By configuring the cutout portion 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by die molding (by one-way die cutting). Further, by inserting the wiring W from the notch 481a1, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guide arm 481.

  The portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a other than the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed has a shorter interval with the attachment portion 481d than the overhang width of the front locking portion 481f. Therefore, in a state where the wiring W is accommodated in the first guide arm 481 and is extended in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), it is possible to prevent the wiring W from dropping to the front side (FIG. 27A). Can be prevented.

  The plate-shaped arm portion 481a includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape over the width direction on a side surface facing the attachment portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other cylindrical portion 481c that is pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and a rib protruding from the second guide arm 482 at an intermediate portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. It is formed alternately with the portion N.

  The other-side cylindrical portion 481c includes an enlarged-diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially increased. In order to form an overlap with the second guide arm, the end surface on the back side is closer to the front than the bottom 481e. It is formed (see FIG. 25B).

  The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 is formed over a half circumference (upper half circumference in FIG. 25A) on the inner peripheral side of the other cylindrical portion 481c, and is formed from the other bottom portion 481e2 of the other cylindrical portion 481c. It is a depression formed to a length approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side cylindrical portion 481c (see FIG. 25C).

  The attachment portion 481d includes an arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 formed as an arc coaxial with the other-side cylindrical portion 481c around the other-side cylindrical portion 481c, and is extended forward from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. . Thereby, even when the flat locking portion 481f is formed, a gap for inserting the wiring from the front side can be secured.

  The attachment portion 481d includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape in the width direction on a side surface facing the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N protruding from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in an intermediate portion of the attachment portion 481d.

  The arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arc-shaped shape formed when the wiring W is bent to the outside (the upper right in FIG. 27B) of the other cylindrical portion 481c. You.

  Also, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed at the upper end inside the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), when replacing or maintaining the wiring W, the wiring is attached along a route that is not blocked by the rear case 210. You need to remove it. In the present embodiment, the attachment portion 481d proximate to the upper wall surface of the rear case 210 is formed to protrude forward from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a separated from the upper wall surface of the rear case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wiring W, the wiring W may be pulled out to the front side and pulled out in the direction from the attachment portion 481d to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. It will not be. The wiring may be inserted in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of the replacement of the wiring W can be improved.

  The bottom portion 481e is disposed above the one-side tubular portion 481b and is formed above the one-side tubular portion 481c in a fan shape around the axis of the one-side tubular portion, and is disposed above the other-side tubular portion 481c. And a bottom portion 481e2 formed in a fan shape centered on an axis spaced a predetermined distance upward from the axis of the side cylindrical portion 481c. Note that the end of the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 is formed to the left in a front view from the end of the other-side bottom portion 481e2.

  The flat locking portion 481f is a claw-shaped member that prevents the wiring W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed with a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

  26 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 482, FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 482, and FIG. 26 (c) is XXVIc of FIG. 26 (a). 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 taken along line XXVIc, and FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 taken along line XXVId-XXVId in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), the second guide arm 482 has a plurality of configurations having the same technical concept as the first guide arm 481, and therefore the description of the configuration is omitted. I do. That is, the plate-like arm portion 481a is on the plate-like arm portion 482a, the other-side tubular portion 481c is on the other-side tubular portion 482c, the attachment portion 481d is on the attachment portion 482d, the bottom portion 481e is on the bottom portion 482e, and the front locking portion. 481f corresponds to the front locking portion 482f, respectively.

  The plate-shaped arm portion 482a has a cutout portion 482a2 at a portion opposed to the front locking portion 482f. The technical idea of the notch 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the notch 481a1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d include a rib portion N on a side surface facing each other. A rib portion N is formed in the attachment portion 482d in the vicinity of the one-side pivot portion 482b that is pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481. In the middle portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is formed by the plate-shaped arm portion 482a. And the attachment portions 482d.

  The second guide arm 482 has a one-side support 482b, which is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the upper right portion of the bottom 482e to the front side and has a fastening portion formed at the tip thereof, and the one-side support 482b as an axis. One bottom 482e1 formed in a substantially circular arc shape and extending coplanar from the bottom 482e, and the right end of the plate-like arm 482a protruding from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the one bottom 482e1 to the front side. And an arc-shaped plate portion 482a1 connected to the main body.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arc-shaped shape formed when the wiring W is bent outward (upper right in FIG. 27B) of the other cylindrical portion 481c. You.

  The one-side shaft support portion 482b is a portion where the reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other side cylindrical portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 is the other side cylinder. It is formed so as to be able to contact the rear side surface of the shape portion 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottoms 481e and 482e are formed on the same plane, and the bottoms 481e and 482e can contact each other in the respective rotation directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. It is formed. Therefore, excessive rotation of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and the wiring W can be prevented from being excessively bent (see FIG. 27).

  The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed over a half circumference (the lower half circumference in FIG. 26 (a)) on the outer peripheral side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b, and is also formed from one side bottom portion 482e1 side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b to one side shaft. The depression is formed to a length approximately half the length of the support portion 482b (see FIG. 26C).

  Next, the swing of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 27A and 27B are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. 27A illustrates a state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state in FIG. 29), and FIG. The state where the second guide arm 482 is swung counterclockwise from the state of a) to the end of the movable range in which the second guide arm 482 can swing with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33). Illustrated. In FIG. 27 (b), one side bottom 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 and the other side bottom 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 are in contact with each other, thereby preventing the second guide arm 482 from further swinging. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the wiring W is formed by a concave portion (FIG. 25D and FIG. 26D) formed by the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and 482a, the attachment portions 481d and 482d, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e. ) See). Therefore, due to the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent to such a degree that the wiring W is broken during the movement of the main body member 410.

  In addition, at the pivotal support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 (the right end in FIG. 27A), the wiring W is disposed so as to wrap around the other-side cylindrical portion 481c. Therefore, at the pivotal support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is suppressed from being bent with a radius of curvature equal to or smaller than the diameter of the other cylindrical portion 481c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent, and it is possible to suppress disconnection of the wiring W.

  The state of FIG. 27A corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 29, that is, the state where the main body member 410 is located at the retracted position. As for the speed at which the main body member 410 is moved from the retreat position to the overhang position, the higher the speed, the easier it is to improve the effect. When starting up the main body member 410 from the stopped state at the retracted position, it is necessary that the driving device 460 generate a driving force that exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotation resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 constituting the wiring guide arm 480 at the pivotal support position be small.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, in a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 around the axis of the one cylindrical portion 481b. The reduced diameter portion 482b1 surrounds. The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are depressed in a direction away from a counterpart member forming a shaft support relationship, and have an effect of suppressing rotational friction during rotation of the shaft. In a state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the entire circumference of the one cylindrical portion 481b. Therefore, resistance when rotating the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27B, the range in which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one cylindrical portion 481b is substantially half a circumference (FIG. 27B: upper half circumference). ). As shown in FIG. 27B, the large-diameter portion 481c1 and the small-diameter portion 482b1 mostly overlap. In this case, the rotation resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state of FIG.

  From the state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the larger the diameter-increasing portion 481c1 and the diameter-reducing portion 482b1 overlap as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481. And the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increases. That is, as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be reduced.

  Therefore, the speed at which the other side bottom portion 481e2 and one side bottom portion 482e1 come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 make contact between the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1. The load received by contact can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are opposite to each other by vigor (the second guide arm 482 is moved to the opposite side in FIG. 27). It can be prevented from being bent to the side further rotated counterclockwise from the state (b).

  In the present embodiment, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by three members being pivotally supported, the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is variable even when the moving speed of the main body member 410 is constant. can do.

  For example, in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one way, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (posture). Changeable) is changeable. Therefore, even while the main body member 410 is moving, the movement speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by changing the posture of the third guide arm 483. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is not necessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the other-side bottom portion 481e2 and the one-side bottom portion 482e1 come into contact with each other, a gap is formed between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. Even if the wiring W is bent outward (upper right in FIG. 27B) of the other cylindrical portion 481c due to this gap, the wiring W is sandwiched between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. Can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the wiring guide arm 480 is in an open state, the wiring W largely moves to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c, and particularly, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide The wiring W is likely to be displaced near the end of the arm 482 (supporting position). When the wiring W is repeatedly displaced with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W rubs against the inner surfaces of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, and the durability of the wiring W is increased. There is a possibility that the property is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the rib W formed on the inner surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are hooked on the wiring W. The resistance with the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the displacement of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  In the vicinity of the pivotal support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is effective by forming the rib N on the side surface opposite to the direction in which the wiring W separates from the other cylindrical part 481c. Can be supported. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W extending from the connecting position of the arc-shaped attachment portions 481d1 to the attachment portion 481d is pressed against the plate-shaped arm portion 481a along the shape of the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1. . Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be increased.

  Note that the wiring W is fitted into the recess by bending the side surface of the portion near the pivotal position of the plate-like arm portion 481a against which the wiring W is pressed toward the opposite side of the attachment portion 481d. The displacement between W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be suppressed. In this case, since the surface of the curved dent and the wiring W are in surface contact with each other, the local wear of the wiring W is suppressed as compared with the case where the wiring W receives resistance at the point contact from the rib portion N. Can be.

  Further, the space between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d may be increased near the pivotal support position. For example, the attachment portion 481d may be inclined in such a manner as to move away from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a as the distance from the front locking portion 481f on the right side in FIG. 27B toward the other cylindrical portion 481c increases. In this case, the slack of the wiring W in the vicinity of the support portion is obtained by bending the wiring W by a portion where the distance between the attachment portion 481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is increased (a portion in the vicinity of the other cylindrical portion 481c). The wiring W can be absorbed and the displacement of the wiring W at the intermediate portion of the first guide arm 481 (the portion sandwiched between the front locking portions 481f) can be suppressed (the wiring W cancels the slack near the supporting portion). Therefore, displacement of the first guide arm 481 in the longitudinal direction can be suppressed). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481 and to be worn, thereby improving the durability of the wiring W.

  In an intermediate portion between the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the rib portions N are formed alternately on the inner side surfaces opposed to each other. Therefore, compared to the case where the rib portion N is formed only on one of the inner surfaces facing each other, the wiring W can be more easily hooked on more rib portions N. Thereby, the resistance between the wiring W and the first and second guide arms 481 and 482 can be increased, and the displacement between the wiring W and the first and second guide arms 481 and 482 is suppressed. can do.

  In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped collar member C fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The collar member C is fastened and fixed to, for example, the tip of the one-side shaft support 482b or the tip of the shaft support 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted through the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the front of each of the tubular portions 481b, 481c. It is a member that prevents movement to the side.

  In the present embodiment, the collar member C extends to a position where at least a part thereof overlaps the adjacent attachment portions 481d and 482d in a front view, or does not overlap with the attachment portions 481d and 482d in a front view. 482d to a position where the wiring W does not fall off. For example, at the left end in FIG. 27B, a gap is formed between the collar member C and the attachment portion 481d, but the wiring W is separated from the one-side cylindrical portion 481b (the portion where the wiring W is deformed outward). Therefore, there is little possibility that the wiring W falls off from the gap. That is, since the collar member C is extended so as to overlap with the wiring W when viewed from the front (FIG. 27), the collar member C has a diameter sufficient to prevent the wiring W from falling off. This prevents the wiring W from dropping from the wiring guide arm 480.

  Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed to have the same length, the collar member C abuts when the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded, It cannot be folded. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 have different longitudinal lengths. That is, in a state where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded until their extending directions are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are arranged on the front side of the one-side cylindrical portion 481b. The collar member C provided is different from the collar member C provided on the front side of the other cylindrical portion 482c to such an extent as not to interfere.

  Thus, by disposing the collar member C, the wiring W can be prevented from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480, and the arrangement space can be suppressed by folding the wiring guide arm 480. It is desirable that the length in the longitudinal direction (the length up to the axis of the collar member C) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is different from the diameter of the collar member C or more.

  Next, the operation of the composite operation unit 400 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33, a change in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described.

  28 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 32 is a front view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a rear view of the composite operation unit 400.

  28 and 29 illustrate a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. In FIGS. 30 and 31, the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the state in FIGS. 28 and 29. The state where the main body member 410 is disposed at an intermediate position where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the inner end of the guide hole 424b while the state is maintained, is shown in FIGS. 32 and 33. The state where the member 410 is arranged at the overhang position is illustrated.

  In FIG. 28, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIGS. 28, 30, and 32, a part of the main body member 410 is illustrated by hidden lines, and the overlapping portion P is indicated by imaginary lines. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is magnified and, in the magnified view, a state where the connecting member 423 has moved by a predetermined amount from the center-side ends of the pair of guide holes 424 b is illustrated by imaginary lines. Is done. Also, in FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is magnified and the state in which the insertion shaft portion 421c has moved a predetermined amount from the lower end of the guide hole 413 in the magnified view is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The main body member 410 is moved up and down along the guide hole 452 with the movement of the leg member 440 meshed with the drive gear 463 when the drive gear 463 is rotated.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421 d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 when the main body member 410 is located at the retracted position. Thus, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported. In this state, the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the left and right outer end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft 421c of the shielding member 420 is located at the lower end of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. And the wiring guide arm 480 is folded so that the extending directions of the respective guide arms are parallel to each other. In addition, since the upper surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 are in contact with each other, the downward movement of the main body member 410 is prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of a mechanical part such as the transmission gear 435 of the swinging member 430 is provided with a gap formed between a pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 (formed at the center in the left-right direction and downward). It is arranged in a gap that becomes wider as it goes (see FIGS. 28 and 34). Thus, in a state where the main body member 410 is located at the retreat position, the swing member 430 can be arranged vertically in the shielding member 420, and the width of the shielding member 420 and the swing member 430 in the vertical direction can be reduced. Can be suppressed. In this case, the area in front view formed by the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swing member 430 can be reduced, and accordingly, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be made larger.

  Here, for example, a mechanical portion such as the transmission gear 435 of the swing member 430 may be provided on the front side of the main body member 410 in some cases. In this case, in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decoration member 422 (to move the main body member 410 and the decoration member 422 in the moving direction of the main body member 410), the decoration member 422 is moved by the mechanical part. It is conceivable to arrange them on the front side. On the other hand, in this case, since it is necessary to move the swing member 430 that accommodates the decorative member 422 to the front side (the direction away from the main body member 410), the space on the front side of the swing member 430 is suppressed, and the neck It is difficult to form the swing member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accommodate at least a part (mechanical part such as the transmission gear 435) of the swing member 430 in a space generated by the pair of decorative members 422 being separated from each other. it can. Accordingly, for example, it is not necessary to move the decoration member 422 to the front side of the mechanical part of the oscillating member 430 in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decoration member 422. 430 can be located proximate to body member 410. Thereby, the swing member 430 can be formed three-dimensionally on the front side.

  In FIG. 28, since the swing member 430 takes a posture in which the main body member 431 is inclined (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in a front view is suppressed as compared with the standing posture (see FIGS. 32 and 35). You. Therefore, even when the swing member 430 is viewed alone, the area of the swing member 430 formed in a front view can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position, the contact plate 421 d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411. Thus, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported (that is, the shielding member 420 has the same posture as the posture in FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423 e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the left and right inner end of the guide hole 424 b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421 c of the shielding member 420 is located at the lower end of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in The wiring guide arm 480 has a third guide arm 483 mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 each take a posture inclined with respect to the left-right direction.

  Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the state in which the third guide arm 483 is stably mounted on the upper surface of the main body member 410 is referred to as the main body member. It can be maintained longer during the movement of 410. This makes it possible to further stabilize the wiring W disposed inside the wiring guide arm 480, and to prevent disconnection of the wiring W.

  Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at a high speed and is disposed at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 rebounds at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420. The pivot position (the pivot rod 423c, see FIG. 23) between the member 421 and the connecting member 423 may jump upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 may not be stabilized. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide hole 413 for guiding the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed to be inclined upward and inward in the left-right direction, and the guide for guiding the slide shaft portion 423e. A hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction.

  In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the insertion shaft portion 421c is a component of a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the pivotal support position of the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423 rebounds. Is guided so as to be movable in the direction having

  Therefore, a resistance F is applied downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 to the insertion shaft portion 421c which is moved upward with the upward movement of the swing base member 421, and the upper portion of the insertion shaft portion 421c. Movement to is suppressed. In this case, the swing base member 421 is prevented from jumping upward, and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is prevented from jumping back at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swing base member 421 jumps upward and the connecting member 423 jumps upward, the movement of the connecting member is suppressed because the slide shaft portion 423e is in contact with the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424b. Is done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the bent portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423, and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 rebounds at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the bent portion 423b is formed on the swing base member 421. (The bent portion 213b moves toward the center in the left-right direction by a distance X). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 rebounds at the inner end in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b, a sufficient interval can be formed between the connecting member 423 and the swing base member 421, and Collision with the swing base member 421 can be prevented. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  In a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position, the connecting member 423 connected to the swing base member 421 suppresses the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 starts to move leftward in front view due to disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted into the right guide hole 424b in front view is located at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of guide holes 424b. The movement of the swing base member 421 is suppressed by the end portion, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

  32 and 33, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 in a state where the main body member 410 is located at the extended position. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423 e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the left and right inner end of the guide hole 424 b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421 c of the shielding member 420 is located at the upper end of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in Further, the wiring guide arm 480 is in a posture in which the other bottom portion 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 (see FIG. 25) and the one bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 (see FIG. 26) abut in the swing direction. Take.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the overhang position, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c move upward along the guide holes 413 in the left and right opposite directions along with the movement. That is, the forces applied to the pair of swing base members 421 from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 are directed in opposite directions to the left and right, and cancel each other. Therefore, the displacement of the pivot shaft hole 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axis of the pair of pivot base members 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed, and the displacement of the shielding member 420 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the main body member 410 is located at the extended position, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 are in contact with each other. Accordingly, for example, even if one of the swing base members 421 moves faster than the other swing base member 421 and the pair of swing base members 421 are displaced from each other (vertical displacement), the other swing base member 421 is shifted. The contact with the swing base member 421 can suppress the displacement. Thereby, the posture of the shielding member 420 at the extended position can be stabilized.

  The change in the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap in a front view. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the main body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position to the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, the shielding member 420 is moved above the main body member 410, particularly in the central portion in the left-right direction, and the area of the overlapping portion P is increased. Is reduced. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 are separately visible.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position, the area in the front view of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 is larger when the main body member 410 is arranged at the extended position. In particular, the width in the vertical direction at the center in the horizontal direction is increased. In this case, in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which is easy to attract the player's attention, the area change in the front view of the area formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be increased, and the effect is produced. The effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described change in the area of the overlapping portion P occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to protrude to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Thus, the effect can be performed as if the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Next, the operation of the swing member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 along the line XXXV-XXXV in FIG. In FIG. 34, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted is illustrated by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422b of the decorative member 422 is housed between the main body member 431 and the main body member 410 of the swing member 430. The illustrated state is shown. Further, in FIG. 35, a state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is upright is illustrated by a solid line, and a state in which the swing member 430 is tilted is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and is arranged in an extended state. The moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is shown in phantom lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23), and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, whereby the connection shaft 435c moves back and forth, and the connection is established. When the connecting member 436 pivotally supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 pivotally supported by the coupling member 436 swings about the shaft supporting portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in a direction approaching and separating from the decoration member 422b. The swing member 430 can be switched between an inclined state shown in FIG. 34 and an upright state shown in FIG. 35 at an arbitrary position, and can change its posture as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

  Since the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swing member 430, when the swing member 430 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side which is arranged to face the shielding member 420. The distance D between the body member 410 and the main body member 410 can be made large. On the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the oscillating member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 can be reduced, and the oscillating member 430 can slide compared to the case where the oscillating member 430 slides back and forth. The space required for arranging can be reduced.

  In other words, when securing a space for accommodating the shielding member 420 by sliding in the front-rear direction, the lower end of the oscillating member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 also moves by the interval D similarly to the upper end. Accordingly, a space for disposing the swing member 430 is increased. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the swing member 430 is swung, the shielding member 420 is smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430, and the arrangement area of the swing member 430 is reduced. It is possible to achieve both suppression.

  In the present embodiment, the change width d of the outer shape of the lower portion on the front side of the main body member 431 is particularly small during the tilting operation of the swing member 430. For this reason, even if the main body member 431 is tilted in a state where another member is close to or in contact with the lower part of the main body member 431 (see FIG. 9), it is possible to suppress a load between the members.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) arranged to face the main body member 431 has a downwardly curved surface, and the main body member 431 approaches the curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap in a front view). Thus, the posture of the main body member 431 can be changed with a large width at the upper part of the main body member 431, while ensuring the effect of bringing the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 close to each other at the lower part of the main body member 431 and ensuring the effect of being integrally visible. it can.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decorative member 422 of the shielding member 420 is inclined downward (toward the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23)) or rearward (toward the main body member 410). Then, it is formed to be curved in a direction away from the swing member 430. In this case, when the decoration member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, a distance between the decoration member 422 and the swing member 430 can be secured, and the decoration member 422 and the neck can be secured. Collision with the swing member 430 can be avoided.

  In addition, the lower end of the decorative member 422 can be stored deeply (downward) in the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430 while the upper end of the decorative member 422 extends toward the front. . Since no other members are arranged on the front side of the swing member 430, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front portion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

  As illustrated in FIG. 35, in a state where the swing member 430 is upright, the decoration member 422 is separated upward from between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, and the body member 431 of the swing member 430 is moved upward. The upper end portion and the main body member 410 are arranged close to each other. Thus, a dead space in a case where the decorative member 422 is not accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430 can be filled. Further, by making it possible to form a posture in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is disposed close to the main body member 410, the movement width of the swing member 430 in the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front-rear width is defined is increased. As a result, the effect of the swinging motion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

  Here, FIG. 34 illustrates a state where the swing member 430 is disposed above the third symbol display device 81 and the swing member 430 is tilted. In this case, the direction A1 of the effect surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is a direction inclined obliquely downward toward the front. On the other hand, in FIG. 35, the swing member 430 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the state in which the swing member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the production surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the degree of swing of the swinging member 430, the directions A1 and A2 on the front side of the swinging member 430 are directed toward the eyes of the player (the front side at the center of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted. Therefore, the attention power of the swing member 430 can be improved, and the effect of the production can be improved.

  Further, a new rotating shaft is not provided to improve the attention power of the swing member 430, but the shaft supporting portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is used. That is, the shaft support 416 is used for securing the distance between the decoration member 422 and the swing member 430 when the decoration member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, This is also used for the purpose of adjusting the directions A1 and A2 on the front side of the member 430 to the direction toward the eyes of the player (the front side at the center of the third symbol display device 81).

  The degree of swing of the swing member 430 can be determined based on whether or not the sensor passage portion 435d passes through the photo sensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passage portion 435d has not passed through the photosensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passage section 435 has passed through the photosensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gap between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410 is ensured in a state where the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photosensor 417.

  Therefore, by moving up the main body member 410 in a state where the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photosensor 417, the shielding member 420 can be connected to the main body member 410 without causing the swing member 430 and the shielding member 420 to interfere with each other. It can be accommodated between the swinging member 430.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, a description will be given of how the shape of the hanging portion 422b suppresses a malfunction of the combined operation unit 400. FIG. 36 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along line XXXVII-XXXVII in FIG. FIGS. 36 and 37 show a state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted by a predetermined angle from the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the back side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b. .

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down in a state where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is in the middle position between the upright state (see FIG. 35) and the inclined state (see FIG. 34). In some cases. This control is performed, for example, when the composite operation unit 400 is immediately changed from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG.

  Here, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) that drives the main body member 410 after confirming that the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted (see the broken line in FIG. 35) from the standing state shown in FIG. Is rotated, a state in which the back side of the main body member 431 abuts the hanging portion 422b cannot occur (see FIG. 34).

  However, in this case, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated after the operation of the swing member 430 is completed. Therefore, as compared with the case where the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) for tilting the swing member 430 and the drive motor 462 for driving the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the combined operation unit 400 is moved from the state of FIG. The period for changing to the state becomes longer. In other words, the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 need to be driven simultaneously in order to immediately change the composite operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. In this case, the main body member 410 is moved up and down while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 moves from the upright state (see FIG. 35) to the inclined state (see FIG. 34). In this case, the main body 431 of the swing member 430 may come into contact with the hanging portion 422b, and the composite operation unit 400 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the hanging portion 422b is formed to be curved (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the contact of the swing member 430 with the back side (formed in a plane) of the main body member 431 is not a contact with a surface but with a point (line). And the frictional resistance at the contact position can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning due to the contact between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b.

  For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is moving upward from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging part 422b is reduced. If it is large, it causes a reduction in the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, so that the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. In addition, as the main body member 410 moves upward, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 becomes inclined due to the curved shape of the hanging portion 422b, so that the hanging portion 422b applies a driving force to the main body member 431 of the swing member 430. Giving relationships arise. Thus, the burden of the drive motor 433 causing the swinging member 430 to tilt can be reduced.

  In addition, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state where the main body member 410 is moving downward from FIG. 34, the friction at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging part 422b. If the resistance is large, it causes a reduction in the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, so that the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, since the hanging portion 422b is formed to be inclined downward and inclined backward, and the back side of the main body member 431 is formed in a flat shape, even if the main body member 410 moves downward while making contact with each other, the hanging portion 422b is formed. The 422b and the main body member 431 do not catch on each other.

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted. Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted, the state of the composite operation unit 400 can be changed immediately.

  Next, the swing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the swing operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 38 and 39 show a state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position.

  Although the swing operation unit 500 is constituted by a pair of left and right operation units (see FIG. 5), since their technical structures are common, in FIG. 38 to FIG. The unit will be described as a swing operation unit 500.

  FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 41 is an exploded rear perspective view of the swing operation unit 500. In FIG. 40, the fastening hole 527 is partially enlarged and in FIG. 41, the bridging member 528 is partially enlarged.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the swing operation unit 500 includes a base member 510 having a rectangular plate shape, and shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends. The distance between the central axis of the drive-side arm member 520 in the form of a long plate that is pivotally supported and the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is the shaft support hole 522 of the drive-side arm member 520. , 526 having a length equal to the distance between the central axes thereof, and having a shaft support hole 532 at one end thereof pivotally supported by the base member 510 so as to be swingable. A horizontally long block-shaped moving member 540 that is swingably supported by the other shaft support hole 526 of the drive arm member 520 and the other shaft support hole 533 of the driven arm member 530; Driving force to swing the A driving device 550 for generating the light, and a front plate member 560 disposed on the front side of the base member 510 with the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 interposed therebetween and to which the driving motor 551 is fastened and fixed. Prepare.

  The base member 510 includes a plate-shaped main body 511, a plurality of pivots 512 protruding from the right side of the main body 511 in a front view to the front side, and a lowermost first of the pivots 512. A drive gear receiving hole 513 formed on the left side of the triaxial portion 512c in a front view, a photo sensor 514 disposed on the right side of the shaft support portion 512, and a rectangular shape of the main body portion 511 from the left side in a front view to the front side. And a lower support 515 projecting in shape.

  The main body portion 511 is formed such that the height of the upper end portion is different between the left side of the first shaft portion 512a when viewed from the front and the right side when viewed from the front. That is, a step-down portion 511a having an upper side surface lowered by one step is provided on the left side of the first shaft portion 512a in a front view.

  The step-down portion 511a has an effect of expanding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 8). Further, in a state where the moving member 540 is located at the retracted position, for example, when the driven arm member 530 falls backward, the area where the driven arm member 530 and the main body 511 may abut in the front-rear direction is reduced. It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). Accordingly, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position to the extended position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the extended position to the retracted position, the driven arm member 530 and the main body 511 are connected to each other. The area that may be rubbed can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be moved smoothly.

  The shaft support portion 512 is formed of three rod members that are arranged vertically apart from each other and have axes parallel to each other, and a first end on which one end of the driven arm member is supported in order from the top. A shaft portion 512a, a second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive-side arm member is supported, and a third shaft portion 512c on which a transmission gear 553 meshed with the drive gear 552 is supported. Prepare mainly.

  The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole that internally fits a stepped portion that protrudes to the rear side of the drive gear 552.

  The lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower surface of the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 when the drive-side arm member 520 is located at the retracted position, and the other end of the drive-side arm member 520. The part is prevented from swinging further downward.

  The drive-side arm member 520 is a member formed of a resin material, and includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a long plate shape and one end of the main body plate portion 521 (the right end portion in a front view). ), A one-side shaft support hole 522 that is bored in the front-rear direction and through which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted, and a semicircle around the one-side shaft support hole 522 formed below the one-side shaft support hole 522. A gear portion 523 in which gear teeth are engraved on the outer periphery of the sensor portion, a sensor passage plate 524 fastened and fixed to a raised portion 521a raised from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 523 to the front side, and a one-side shaft support hole 522. A collar member 525 having a coaxially disposed through-hole and fastened and fixed to the rear side of the main body plate portion 521, and a collar member 525 formed in the other end portion (left end in front view) of the main body plate portion 521 in the front-rear direction. The second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via a collar. A pair of fastening holes 527 including a pair of fastening holes 527a1 and 527b1 that are disposed near the other end of the main body plate portion 521 and are drilled in the front-rear direction. And a bridging member 528 through which the insertion portions 528a2 and 528b2 are inserted and secured.

  The main body plate portion 521 includes, at one end (the right end in FIG. 40), a raised portion 521a which is inserted into the guide hole 563 and fastens and fixed to the distal end of the sensor passage plate 524.

  The gear portion 523 is a portion that meshes with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the driving device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a that is covered on the front side.

  In the present embodiment, the umbrella portion 523a is formed so as to cover the entire gear teeth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily need to cover the entire gear teeth 523, and is formed so as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. 553b can be contacted, and wobble of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

  The sensor passage plate 524 is a member disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion which is raised and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. 524a and a sensor passing plate portion 524b extending radially from the fastening portion 524a around the one shaft support hole 522 in the assembled state.

  The sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that is disposed to face the front side surface of the front plate member 560 and that passes through the inside of the photosensor 514. Here, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passage plate portion 524b is brought into contact with the front plate member 560. Shaft tilting with respect to the two shaft portion 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that can detect that the driving-side arm member 520 has been placed in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photosensor 514. That is, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be used for both increasing the resistance to the deformation of the driving arm member 520 (shaft tilt) and detecting the posture of the driving arm member 520.

  The collar member 525 is a plate-like member having an outer shape formed in a substantially rhombic shape with rounded corners, and includes a main body 525a having a circular outer shape having a diameter in the short-side end of the outer shape, and a main body 525a. An outer fitting hole 525b drilled at the center of the portion 525a, and a pair of fastening portions 525c disposed on the left and right sides of the main body 525a and having a tapered tip and fastened and fixed to the main body plate 521; Mainly equipped.

  The pair of fastening holes 527 include a first fastening hole 527a to which the first bridging member 528a is fixed, and a second fastening hole 527b to which the second bridging member 528b is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the other shaft support portion 526 side (the side on which the moving member 540 is provided) of the driving side arm member 520, so that the fastening holes 527 and one side shaft are provided. A long distance from the support hole 522 can be ensured. Therefore, as described later, even when the driven side arm member 530 contacts the bridging member 528 and there is a possibility that the drive side arm member 520 may be twisted, the deformation is performed by the fastening hole 527 and the one side shaft support hole 522. And a long distance can be used at the portion between them (the torsion angle per a predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, a load (a load in a direction in which the second shaft portion 512b is folded and folded) applied from the one shaft support hole 522 to the second shaft portion 512b can be suppressed, and the durability of the second shaft portion 512b is improved. be able to.

  The first fastening hole 527a is provided with a first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridging member 528a is fastened and fixed, and is formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 and the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is inserted therethrough. And a first pinning hole 527a2 to which the first bridge member 528a is non-rotatably fixed.

  The first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the short direction of the driving arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .

  The second fastening hole 527b is provided with a second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridging member 528b is fastened and fixed, and is formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 and the auxiliary projection 528b3 is inserted therethrough. A second pinning hole 527b2 to which the second bridging member 528b is non-rotatably fixed, and a base 527b3 formed in such a manner that the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 are raised to the front side. , Is provided.

  The second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are arranged along a line that forms a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the short direction of the driving arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). . That is, when the second bridging member 528b bends and deforms toward the near side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the driving arm member 520 is determined by the twist direction (the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the driving arm member 520). It can be divided in the bending direction (the direction in which the drive side arm member 520 bends to the front side). Thus, when the second bridge member 528b receives a load from the driven side arm member 530 and bends, the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented from being twisted around the longitudinal direction.

  The bridging member 528 is provided on a first bridging member 528a disposed on a side closer to the other-side shaft supporting portion 526, and on a side opposite to the other-side shaft supporting portion 526 across the first bridging member 528a. And a second bridging member 528b formed larger (longer and wider in the lateral direction) than the first bridging member 528a.

  The first bridging member 528a includes a main body 528a1 formed in a long plate shape, an insertion portion 528a2 that is inserted into the first fastening hole 527a1 and fastened and fixed, and protrudes adjacent to the insertion portion 528a2. An auxiliary protrusion 528a3, a rib 528a4 formed along a side edge of the main body 581a1 near the other shaft support hole 526, and protruding toward the rear side, and an end of the rib 528a4. And an inclined portion 528a5 inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

  The main body 528a1 is formed to have a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is a portion that is inserted into a first pin fastening hole 527a2 formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is connected to the main body plate portion 521. Are supported at two points. Therefore, the bridging member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relatively.

  Since the rib 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body 528a1, the rib 528a4 suppresses contact with the driven arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it can easily contact the member 530. The details will be described later.

  The second bridging member 528b is formed in a long plate shape, an insertion portion 528b2 inserted through the second fastening hole 527b1 and fastened and fixed, and protrudes adjacent to the insertion portion 528b2. An auxiliary protruding portion 528b3, a rib portion 528b4 formed along a side edge close to the other shaft support hole 526 on the other side of the main body portion 581b1 and protruding toward the rear side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528b4. And an inclined portion 528b5 inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

  The main body 528b1 is formed to have a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in an assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary projecting portion 528b3 is a portion that is inserted into a second pin fastening hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is connected to the main body plate portion 521. Are supported at two points. Therefore, the bridging member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relatively.

  Since the rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, contact with the driven arm member 530 is suppressed at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven arm is at the extended position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it can easily contact the member 530. The details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridging member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping with the driven arm member 530, rather than a width of a portion of the main body 528b1 (see FIG. 41) fastened to the driving arm member 520. It is formed narrower. Accordingly, when the driven arm member 530 abuts on the second bridge member 528b, it is possible to suppress the second bridge member 528b from being twisted around the longitudinal direction (flexing along the longitudinal direction). Can be easier).

  Therefore, the contact between the driven arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b can prevent the second bridging member 528b from being twisted and deformed, thereby limiting the form of deformation. In this case, the arrangement position of the portion (second pin fixing hole 527b2) for preventing the second bridging member 528b from being turned up can be limited, so that the configuration of the second bridging member 528b can be simplified. . That is, it is not necessary to form the auxiliary projection 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the short direction of the second bridge member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

  The driven arm member 530 is a member formed of a resin material, and includes a main body plate portion 531 formed in a long plate shape and one end portion of the main body plate portion 531 (the right end portion in front view). ), One side shaft support hole 532 in which the first shaft portion 512a is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the other end (the left end in front view) of the main body plate portion 531. And a second shaft support hole 533 in which the first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 is supported via a collar.

  The front side surface of the main body plate portion 531 is formed on the same plane as the front side surface of the drive arm member 520.

  The moving member 540 includes a main body 541 that is formed in a block shape that is long in the left and right direction and that has an upper surface formed by a curved surface that is convex downward, and a cylindrical shape that projects rearward on the right side of the main body 541 when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a pair of shaft support portions 542 provided and an alignment portion 543 protruding from the right side surface of the main body portion 451.

  In the present embodiment, the moving member 540 is formed so as to be thicker toward the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 42 (a)). The member 540 is formed on the side that comes into contact, and is formed at a position separated from the driven arm member 530 toward the front side (see FIG. 42).

  The shaft support portion 542 is formed with the same inter-axis distance as the inter-axis distance between the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and in the state shown in FIG. The shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b are formed from a pair of shafts formed in the same manner as the arrangement of the shafts, and mainly include a first shaft portion 542a and a second shaft portion 542b in order from the top.

  The first shaft portion 542a is a portion inserted into the other shaft support hole 533 of the driven arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542b is inserted into the other shaft support hole 526 of the drive arm member 520. Part.

  Here, as described above, the distance between the shaft support holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the distance between the shaft support holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven side arm member 530 are different. Are the same. The relative positions of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b provided on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542a and the second shaft portion 542b provided on the moving member 540 are different. The relationship (the direction and distance of a straight line connecting the axes) is the same. Therefore, a parallel link is formed by the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed during the swing of the driving side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

  The positioning part 543 is a part for adjusting the relative positional relationship between the pair of moving members 540 when the moving member 540 is arranged at the extended position. Note that a recess is formed in the moving member 540 on the right side (see FIG. 8) in front view so as to be able to receive the alignment portion 543 of the left moving member 540.

  The drive device 550 includes a drive motor 551 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the rear side, a drive gear 552 supported by the drive motor 551, and one drive gear 552. The transmission gear 553 mainly meshes with the first gear portion 553a of the second stage and the second gear portion 553b of the second stage meshes with the gear portion 523 of the driving arm member 520.

  The transmission gear 553 is a member in which two-stage gear teeth having different diameters are formed coaxially. The transmission gear 553 includes a first gear portion 553a formed of a large-diameter gear disposed to face the base member 510, and a first gear portion 553a. A second gear portion 553b formed of a gear smaller in diameter than the first gear portion 553a disposed on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and a hole is formed at the center of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b. And a shaft support hole 553c supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

  The front plate member 560 includes a main body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 recessed in the same arrangement as that of the shaft support portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524a of the sensor passage plate 524. And a guide hole 563 that is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus.

  The holding portion 562 is concavely formed with a diameter equal to the diameter of each column of the shaft support portion 512, and the tip of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is internally fitted and fixed. Thus, the shaft support 512 can be supported at both ends, so that the shaft can be stabilized. Accordingly, the operations of the driving arm member 520, the driven arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole 563 is an arc-shaped long hole through which a raised portion 521a protruding from the drive-side arm member 520 toward the sensor passage plate 524 is inserted, and extends in the front-rear direction at a lower end. And a stopper wall 563a. As a result, even if the drive-side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive-side arm member 520 abuts on the guide hole 563 to restrict the movement. Thus, the position of the drive-side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

  The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the movable member 540 from swinging beyond its movable range when the movable member 540 is moved toward the extended position (see FIG. 43). is there. When moving member 540 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 43, stopper wall portion 563a and sensor passage plate 524 and raised portion 521a to which sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed are brought into contact. You. The stopper wall 563a extends not only on the front side but also on the back side. Thus, the contact area between one end of the driving arm member 520 and the stopper wall 563a can be increased, and the sensor passage plate 524 and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed at the time of contact. Can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, the end of the movable range of the swing operation unit 500 will be described. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the swing operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXIIb in FIG. 42 (a). Note that FIG. 42 illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 43 illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, when the moving member 540 swings from the retracted position to the extended position, the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (both swinging to the overhang position), the opposed side surfaces (the right side surface in FIG. 43) remain in a parallel state. Since they are brought closer to each other, it is easy to fit the pair of moving members 540 by fitting the positioning portions 543 together.

  In a state where the moving member 540 is located at the overhang position, the bridging member 528 is put on the front side surface of the driven arm member 530. Further, since the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is reduced, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact when swinging beyond the extended position. Thus, the swing of the drive-side arm member 520 can be stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (right side in FIG. 42) where the pair of moving members 540 abuts in the left-right direction, and In the direction, it is formed apart from the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the bridging member 528 fastened and fixed to the front side of the drive side arm member 520 is extended so as to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, a difference in a fastening position between the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b will be described. Due to the difference between the fastening portions, the ease with which the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b are turned from the drive-side arm member 520 differs.

  Here, “turning up” means that the bridging member 528 receives a force from the driven arm member 530 in the upward direction in FIG. 44 and peels off from the driving arm member 520.

  FIG. 44A is a cross-sectional view of the driving arm member 520, the driven arm member 530, and the first bridging member 528a along the line XXXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 44B is the XXXXIVb of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the 2nd bridge member 528b in the -XXXXXb line.

  First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44B, the second fastening holes 527b1 and the second pin fastening holes 527b2 for receiving the second bridging members 528b are different from the first fastening holes 527a. A platform 527b3 is formed. Thereby, the second embedding width Wb1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528b2 in the second fastening hole 527b1, is longer than the first embedding width Wa1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528a2 in the first fastening hole 527a1. Is done. Therefore, the second bridging member 528b can be fixed more firmly than the first bridging member 528a (the second bridging member 528b is harder to bend than the first bridging member 528a).

  As a second difference, the first overhang width Wa2, which is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state, is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521. It is shorter than the second overhang width Wb2. Therefore, the second bridging member 528b can suppress the deformation near the fastening position as compared with the first bridging member 528a (the second bridging member 528b has a smaller shape than the first bridging member 528a). It is hard to turn up compared).

  A third difference is that the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven arm member 530 with respect to the first pinning hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44A), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is The two-pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed on the side close to the driven arm member 530 as a reference (see FIG. 44B).

  In this case, the driven arm member 530 moves (bends and falls) in the direction (upward in FIG. 44) approaching the bridging member 528, and is fastened when a load is applied from the driven arm member 530 to the bridging member. There is a difference in how to bear in the part.

  That is, when the first bridging member 528a is pushed by the driven arm member 530 and the main body portion 528a1 bends with the insertion portion 528a2 as a starting point, the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is separated from the driving arm member 520 (FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, a frictional force between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and the inner surface of the first pinning hole 527a2 generates a resistance to the turning of the main body 528a1.

  On the other hand, when the second bridging member 528b is pushed by the driven arm member 530 and the main body 528b1 bends with the insertion portion 528b2 as a starting point, the seating surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is pressed against the driving arm member 520. (See FIG. 44B). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 and the inner surface of the second pin hole 527b2, the seat surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is located on the front side (upper side in FIG. 44B) of the main body plate portion 521. , A resistance to the turning of the main body 528b1 is generated.

  Therefore, the resistance of the second bridging member 528b to turning can be increased as compared to the resistance of the first bridging member 528a to turning.

  The distance between the axes of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 is longer than the distance between the axes of the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pinning hole 527a2.

  Due to the above-described first to third differences, a similar load is applied from the driven side arm member 530 to either the first bridging member 528a or the second bridging member 528b toward the front side (upper in FIG. 44). In this case, the second bridging member 528b has a stronger resistance at the root to the turning (a force to resist turning at the fastening position with the driving side arm member 520) than the first bridging member 528a. growing.

  With reference to FIG. 45, a description will be given of an aspect of contact between the driven arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 when the driven arm member 530 is bent and deformed. FIG. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the swing operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXVa in FIG. 43. FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) show the state of FIG. FIG. 13 is a partial side view of the swing operation unit 500 illustrating a manner in which an arm member 530 flexes to the front side in a time series.

  Note that FIG. 45 (a) illustrates a state in which the longitudinal directions of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel, and FIG. 45 (b) illustrates that the driven side arm member 530 has the front side (FIG. 45). FIG. 45 (b) shows a state in which the driven arm member 530 is bent toward the front side from the state shown in FIG. 45 (b). The state in which it is in contact with the bridging member 528b is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridging member 528a is arranged closer to the moving member 540 than the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven arm member 530 is bent to the front side (the left side in FIG. 45) due to factors such as the weight of the moving member 540 and contact with other members, the first bridge is first moved in a stage where the amount of bending is small. The driven arm member 530 abuts on the bridging member 528a (see FIG. 45B). Thereafter, when the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 increases, the first bridging member 528a bends and deforms, and the second bridging member 528b contacts the driven arm member 530 (see FIG. 45 (c)).

  That is, since the displacement of the driven side arm member 530 is greater at the portion in contact with the first bridging member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridging member 528a as compared with the second bridging member 528b. Can be

  Here, if the resistance of the first bridging member 528a to the bending deformation is as large as that of the second bridging member 528b, the first bridging member 528a is bent even if the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 is large. (The drive side arm member 520 may bend instead). In this case, the driven arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b do not come into contact with each other, and only the first bridging member 528a receives a load from the driven arm member 530 alone. The durability of the member 528a decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridging member 528a is fastened to the drive-side arm member 520 in such a manner that the first bridging member 528a is more easily turned at the root portion than the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, before the driven side arm member 530 contacts the second bridging member 528b, the first bridging member 528a is easily turned up (is deformed in the vicinity of the root with respect to the driving side arm member 520).

  In addition, the width of the first bridging member 528a in the short direction is smaller than that of the second bridging member 528b, and the plate thickness is formed to be equal (see FIG. 44). That is, the section modulus of the second bridge member 528b in the same direction is larger than the section modulus of the first bridge member 528a in the direction of the load applied to the bridge member 528 from the driven arm member 530. Is done. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is more likely to bend in the short vertical direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 45A) than the second bridging member 528b.

  This allows the pair of bridging members 528 to contact the driven arm member 530 and receive the load (see FIG. 45 (c)), and distribute the load to the pair of bridging members 528 to bear the load. Therefore, the durability of the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b can be improved.

  The method of receiving the load from the driven arm member 530 by the pair of bridging members 528 is not limited to bending the first bridging member 528a. For example, by making the first overhang width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridging member 528a longer than that of the present embodiment, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge The bridging member 528a may not be abutted, and the pair of bridging members 528 may start to abut on the driven arm member 530 at the same time with the amount of bending shown in FIG. In this case, both the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b can receive the load from the driven arm member 530, and the load is applied to the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b. Can be distributed and paid.

  On the other hand, when the amount of bending is small (see FIG. 45 (b)), the driven arm member 530 does not come into contact with any of the pair of bridging members 528, so it is difficult to suppress the bending of the driven arm member 530. (The bending is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven arm member 530 until the bending amount of FIG. 45C is reached).

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, while the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 is small, the bending can be suppressed by bringing the driven arm member 530 into contact with the first bridging member 528a (FIG. 45). (B)). In addition, as described above, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 increases, the first bridging member 528a bends and deforms, and the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b abut. Accordingly, the load from the driven arm member 530 can be received by the pair of bridging members 528, and the load can be distributed to and shared by the pair of bridging members 528. The durability of the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a description will be given of the front-rear relationship of the driving arm member 520, the driven arm member 530, and the bridging member 528. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 along the line XXXXIV-XXXXXIV in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 shows only a cross-sectional view of a long portion of the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 for easy understanding, and the shapes of the ends of the arm members 520 and 530 are omitted. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 have front side surfaces (upper side surface in FIG. 46) formed substantially in the same plane, and the bridging member 528 is connected to the driven-side arm member 530. It is put on the front side of. Accordingly, the driven arm member 530 moves forward (bending deformation or falling deformation) along the arrow B1, and the driving arm member 520 moves back (bending deformation or falling deformation) along the arrow B2. And rotation (twisting deformation) of the driving arm member 520 along the arrow B3 can be suppressed. That is, the relative movement (deformation) of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed by the contact between the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530.

  Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is disposed on the front side of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of each arm member 520, 530. (See FIG. 42). As described above, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 43), so that the driven arm member 530 is There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven side arm member 530 falls forward, the driven side arm member 530 is supported (contacted) from the front side of the bridge member 528. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the driven arm member 530 from moving toward the front side (toward the near side in FIG. 43), and accordingly, it is possible to prevent the moving member 540 from moving toward the front side.

  Since the driving-side arm member 520 is a member to which the driving force is transmitted, there is a possibility that the driving-side arm member 520 may be swung in the swinging axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the degree of the transmission. The wobble can be suppressed by abutment of the bridge member 528 and the driven arm member 530.

  On the other hand, when the drive-side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation) or rotates clockwise (twisting deformation) in the opposite direction to the arrow B3, the bridge Since the bridging member 528 is moved in a direction away from the driven arm member 530, it is difficult to suppress the movement of the driving arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable to have a mechanism for preventing such movement. Next, referring to FIG. 47, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from moving forward (bending movement or falling down) along the arrow B1, or to set the drive side arm member 520 in the opposite direction of the arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (twist deformation) will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swing operation unit 500 along the line XXXXV-XXXXXV in FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the drive-side arm member 520 is in contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (the upper side in FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 is abutted from the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and the umbrella portion 523a is abutted from the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is arranged on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the drive arm member 520. (See FIGS. 48 to 50).

  Therefore, when the side of the drive side arm member 520 which is close to the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (torsion deformation in the direction opposite to the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 is pressed against the first gear portion 553a. Is moved in a direction in which the umbrella portion 523a is pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the driving side arm member 520 increases. Therefore, the movement (twisting deformation) of the driving side arm member 520 in the direction opposite to the arrow B3 in FIG. 46 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a sensor passage plate 524 is disposed at the front end of one end of the drive-side arm member 520, in front of the front plate member 560. Thus, when the other end (the right side in FIG. 47) of the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation), one end sandwiching the second shaft 512b. The deformation resistance of the drive-side arm member 520 can be increased by contacting the sensor passage plate 524 with the front plate member 560 in the portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 from moving in the direction of arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation).

  As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed with a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, the collar member 525 is formed in a shape smaller than the outer shape of one end of the drive side arm member 520 in a front view, so that the base member 510 and the drive side arm member are formed by the collar member 525. 520 can be reduced in contact area. Therefore, the contact resistance when swinging the drive-side arm member 520 can be suppressed, and the drive motor 551 can be reduced in size.

  Next, the swing operation of the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50 are front views of the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530. 48 shows a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the retracted position as in FIG. 42. FIG. 49 shows a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 520 and the driven side arm FIG. 50 shows a state in which the member 530 has been swung by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 50 shows a state in which the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 are arranged at the extended positions, respectively. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is illustrated by imaginary lines, the sensor passing plate 524 is not illustrated, and a part of the first gear portion 553a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 is indicated by a hidden line. As shown, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted so that the gear teeth are visible.

  As shown in FIG. 48 to FIG. 50, the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 decreases as going from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, the area where the bridge member 528 covers the driven arm member 530 increases from the retreat position to the overhang position, and the driven arm member 530 moves to the front side, and when the bridge member 528 contacts the bridge member 528, The resistance generated from the bridging member 528 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are formed by the one side shaft support hole 532 and the other side shaft support hole of the driven arm member 530. 533 is formed below a straight line. Therefore, at the retracted position, a driven arm member that may change its posture in a manner in which a portion above a straight line connecting the one-side shaft support hole 532 and the other-side shaft support hole 533 falls to the front side (the front side in FIG. 48). The distance between 530 and bridge member 528 can be kept large. Thereby, when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 falls forward and comes into contact with the bridge member 528, so that the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side It is possible to prevent the swing resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are disposed at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction of the driven arm member 530. . Therefore, at the extended position, the distance between the driven-side arm member 530 and the bridging member 528, which may change in posture in a state of falling and deforming starting from the one-side shaft support portion 532, can be reduced. Thus, at the extended position, the driven arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 can be brought into contact with each other, since the amount of deformation of the driven arm member 530 falling down is small.

  That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 528b4 suppress the rocking resistance when the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven arm member 530 is disposed at the extended position. In this state, the contact between the driven arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 can be made compatible from within a small amount of the tilt deformation of the driven arm member 530.

  Further, while the drive side arm member 520 moves from the state where it is located at the retreat position to the state where it is located at the overhang position, at least a part of the bridge member 528 is arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530. . Accordingly, while the bridging member 528 is not disposed on the front side of the driven arm member 530, the driven arm member 530 moves in the axial direction, and the side surface of the driven arm member 530 facing the driving arm member 520. And the bridge member 528 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other. Further, since the driven arm member 530 can always contact the bridging member 528, the effect of suppressing the axial displacement of the driven arm member 530 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in a state where the moving member 540 is located at the extended position, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 50). Take a posture inclined to the opposite side of the. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is necessary to keep operating the drive motor 551 in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving member 540 (to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise in front view).

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (the right side in FIG. 50) where the pair of moving members 540 abut. Therefore, in a state where the moving member 540 is located at the extended position, the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. This can prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise in front view, so that it is not necessary to keep the drive motor 551 operating while the moving member 540 is located at the extended position. As a result, the power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

  The transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the drive-side arm member 520 are in contact in the front-rear direction as described above. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (leftward in FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the driving arm member 520.

  That is, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is generated not only from the engagement of the transmission gear 553 with the second gear portion 553b, but also from the front side (the front side in FIG. 48) of the first gear portion 553a. It can also be transmitted by contact with the back side surface of the portion 523. This can be said that the swing resistance of the drive-side arm member 520 has been reduced. Thus, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be downsized.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 has a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a short direction that is a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the driving arm member 520. It is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 520. Thus, the collar member 525 and the base member 525 are extended along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520 as compared with the range where the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are in contact along the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520. The range of contact with 510 is increased.

  For this reason, the other end (the left end in FIG. 48) of the drive-side arm member 520 starts from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40) inserted through the one-side shaft support hole 522 as a starting point and the front-back direction (FIG. 48). When deforming to bend in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface, the range in which the collar member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) can be increased. Thereby, the deformation resistance of the driving side arm member 520 can be increased.

  The straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553 always intersects the circular outer shape of the main body 525a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. Thus, the center distance between the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be suppressed to the minimum length.

  In other words, there is no need to insert the fastening portion 525c arranged in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553, and therefore, the central axis of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear The center-to-center distance between the 553 and the central axis can be reduced. This inter-axis distance is a distance at which the main body 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be arranged to face each other. Thus, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

  Further, even when the center distance between the center axis of the collar member 525 and the center axis of the transmission gear 553 is the same, when the fastening portion 525c enters between the center axis of the collar member 525 and the center axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area in the axial direction between the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the driving arm member 520 can be increased.

  Next, a swing operation unit 2500 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the end of the bridging member 528 of the swing operation unit 500 is not fixed is described. However, the swing operation unit 2500 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the main body 2561 of the front plate portion 2560 has A thickening portion 2561a for accommodating the tip of the bridging member 2528 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 51A and 51B are partial front views of the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 51A illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the retreat position, and FIG. 51B illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. 51 (a) and FIG. 51 (b), the moving member 540 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the main body 2528a of the bridging member 2528 is formed over the width direction of the driven arm member 530. Accordingly, when the driven arm member 530 moves (falls down or bends) to the front side (front side in FIG. 51), the area of the main body 2528a that contacts the driven side arm member 530 is reduced to the first embodiment. It is possible to enlarge in comparison, and it is possible to suppress the movement of the driven arm member 530.

  The main body 2561 of the front plate member 2560 has a thickened portion 2561a formed by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction (a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 51) at the upper end thereof, and a concave portion provided downward from the upper end surface of the thickened portion 2561a. Accommodating portion 2561b.

  The accommodation portion 2561b is a depression that is recessed in a state where the four sides are closed in a top view, and in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the extended position, the depression where the distal end portion of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated. It is. The inner side surface of the accommodation portion 2561b has a mode in which the movement trajectory of the tip portion (the upper tip portion in FIG. 51A) of the bridging member 2528 is included (the tip portion of the bridging member 2528 moves while the moving member 540 moves). (A form that does not come into contact with the inner side surface of the storage portion 2561b). This prevents the bridging member 2528 from abutting on the rotation-side inner surface of the drive-side arm member 2520 of the inner surface of the storage portion 2561b while moving the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the extended position. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the end of the bridging member 2528 is housed in the housing part 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is located at the extended position. Therefore, for example, when the driven arm member 530 moves to the front side (for example, falls down) to apply a load to the bridging member 2528, the resistance to the load can be improved.

  That is, when the tip of the bridging member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, the bridging member 2528 resists the load from the driven arm member 530 (the load facing the front side in FIG. 51) by cantilever support. (The bridging member 2528 is fastened to the drive-side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the distal end of the bridging member 2528 is housed in the housing part 2561b, the load from the driven arm member 530 can generate a resistive force by supporting both ends (fastening with the driving arm 2520). Position and the accommodation portion 2561b). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the driven arm member 530 from moving to the front side.

  Further, since the bridging member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the driving arm member 2520, the front end of the bridging member 2528 is housed in the housing part 2561b, so that the positioning of the driving arm member 2520 in the front-rear direction is performed. be able to.

  In this case, the positioning of the moving members 540 of the swinging operation unit 2500 formed as a pair of right and left in the front-rear direction can be performed, and the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 8). In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of relative displacement between the pair of moving members 540 in the front-rear direction. Since the accommodation portion 2561b is disposed at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) between the pair of moving members 540 than the driving side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 generated starting from the accommodation portion 2561b Can be reduced.

  Thereby, the effect of correcting the positional deviation between the pair of moving members 540 can be secured, and the pair of moving members 540 can be visually recognized integrally in a state where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the extended position, thereby producing the effect. Can be improved.

  Next, a swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the drive side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment extends outward from the umbrella portion 523a. An overhang portion 3523b is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 52A to 52C are front views of the swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 52D shows the swing along the line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52B. It is sectional drawing of operation | movement unit 3500. In FIG. 52, only the base member 3510, the drive-side arm member 3520, and the drive device 550 are shown for easy understanding, illustration of other members is omitted, and the photo sensor 514 and drive of the base member 3510 are omitted. Illustration of the sensor passage plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

  FIG. 52A shows a state in which the driving arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 52B shows the driving arm member 3520 and the moving member. FIG. 52C shows a state in which the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged at the extended position. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the drive-side arm member 3520 includes an overhang portion 3523b extending outward from the umbrella portion 523a in the axial direction. The overhang portion 3523b is disposed below the second shaft portion 512b regardless of the posture of the drive-side arm member 3520, and has a width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed with the above width (see FIG. 52B). That is, during the swinging operation of the drive-side arm member 3520, one of the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is disposed on the rear side of the overhang portion 3523b.

  The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 that is formed to be curved along the outer periphery of the umbrella portion 523a on the outer side in the axial radial direction of the umbrella portion 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 protrudes from the front side of the main body 511 of the base member 3510 to the same height as the front side surface of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 (see FIG. 52D).

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive-side arm member 3520 from moving (falling down or bending) to the front side starting from the second shaft portion 512b of the shaft support portion 512. That is, the drive-side arm member 3520 moves (falls down or bends) to the front side above the second shaft portion 512b due to the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and moves below the second shaft portion 512b. Moves to the back side (falling down or bending). In this case, in addition to the umbrella portion 523a contacting the front side surface of the transmission gear 553, the overhang portion 3523b contacts the front end surface of the outer peripheral wall 3516. Accordingly, the movement (tilting deformation or bending deformation) of the driving side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by contact at two positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the driving side arm member 3520 is arranged at the extended position, the driving side arm member 3520 is compared with the case where the driving side arm member 3520 is arranged at another position. The contact position between the 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction.

  That is, when the drive-side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position, the umbrella portion 523a is disposed to face the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the extended portion 3523b is located at the second gear portion. 553b is disposed opposite to the front side surface of the main body. In this case, the overhang portion 3523b can contact the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement is not seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

  Further, the state in which the drive side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position is such that the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 3520 is along the up and down direction, so that the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is used for the drive side arm member 3520. This is a state in which movement in the front-rear direction (tilting deformation or bending deformation) is likely to occur with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the contact position between the drive-side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set at a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction. The resistance to the movement of the 3520 in the front-rear direction can be increased, and the movement can be suppressed.

  Next, a composite operation unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth long hole without being caught. However, the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has a concave portion on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is located at the intermediate position. 53 and 54, the illustration of the collar member of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted, and the shaft portion is made visible.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body 410 of the combined operation unit 4400 moves down from the retracted position and is located at the intermediate position, the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 contacts the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. Touch A recessed portion 4424c, which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e, is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b disposed immediately above the contact position. The concave portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the concave portion 4424c is formed to be equal to or larger than the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the shaft support hole 423d disposed at the end of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 contacts the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, the shaft support hole 423d rebounds in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e also rebounds upward due to the momentum of the vertical rebound.

  With reference to FIG. 54, the effect of the concave portion 4424c will be described. FIGS. 54A and 54B are partial front views of the composite operation unit 4400. FIG. FIG. 54 (a) shows a state immediately before the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 comes into contact with the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. In FIG. 54 (b), the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 423 is The state immediately after contacting the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is illustrated. In FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, and the like are omitted for ease of understanding, and the slide shaft 423e and the direction of movement of the opposite end of the slide shaft 423e. Are shown by arrows C41 to C44.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the opposite end of the connecting member 423 on the opposite side of the slide shaft 423e is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft is moved. 423e contacts the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and slides along the arrow C41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not accommodated in the concave portion 4424c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the slide shaft portion 423e abuts against the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, and the end of the connecting member 423 on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e follows the arrow C44. In the case of bouncing upward, the slide shaft 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423e contacts the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and tries to slide along the arrow C43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is housed in the concave portion 4424c.

  Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the concave portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction that is the long direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated for the slide shaft portion 423e that is going to move in the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b.

  Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the slide shaft portion 423e from moving along the left and right directions of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebound width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the driving device 460, the slide shaft portion 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction.

  Next, a composite operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the end on the slide shaft 423e side of the connecting member 423 is in contact with only the guide plate 424 has been described. However, the composite operation unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment employs the sliding of the connecting member 5423. A leaf spring member 5425 which is a plate-like spring member abutting on the end on the shaft portion 423e side is formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is located at the retracted position. As the main body member 410 moves down from the retracted position, the slide shaft 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves in the left and right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

  The connecting member 5423 includes a protruding portion 5423f that protrudes from an end of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft portion 423e side. The protruding portion 5423f is protruded vertically upward with the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 being disposed at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and is also viewed from the right side in rear view (FIG. 56 (c)). The right corner is rounded and the left corner in rear view is formed as a right angle.

  The guide plate 5424 includes a grip portion 5424c that projects in a U-shape on the rear side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer ends of the pair of guide holes 424b. The holding portion 5424c is formed such that the open side of the U-shaped portion is directed inward in the left-right direction, and one end of the leaf spring member 5425 is sandwiched by the inner side surface of the U-shaped portion.

  The details of the leaf spring member 5425 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 56A to 56C are partial rear views of the composite operation unit 5400. FIG. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is illustrated in chronological order, and the periphery of the guide hole 424b on the left side in rear view is partially illustrated. FIG. 56 (b) shows a state in which the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is arranged at the retreat position, and FIG. 56 (b) shows a state in which the main body member 410 has moved a predetermined distance from the retreat position to the intermediate position. In (c), the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position is illustrated.

  56, only the decorative member 422, the connecting member 5423, the guide plate 5424, and the leaf spring member 5425 are illustrated in FIG. 56, and other members are not illustrated. Further, the decoration member 422 and the connecting member 5423 show only the outer shape, and the illustration of the internal pattern and the like is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the leaf spring member 5425 is disposed in a posture in which the long direction is directed to the left and right, and one end portion is a fixed portion 5425a in the form of a straight plate that is gripped by the grip portion 5424c. And a curved portion 5425b which is connected to the other end of the fixed portion 5425a and protrudes toward the connecting member to form a curve, and a left-right direction from the inner end (right side in FIG. 56 (a)) of the curved portion 5425b. And a fall prevention part 5425c extended to the main part.

  The curved portion 5425b is formed such that a first inclined surface 5425b1 formed on the outside in the left-right direction and a second inclined surface 5425b2 formed on the inside in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. That is, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left / right direction (the inclination angle is reduced), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is rapidly inclined from the left / right direction (the inclination angle is increased to near a right angle).

  The fall prevention portion 5425c is in contact with the upper end of the protruding portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b. Accordingly, even if the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side to the gripping portion 5424c may drop downward due to aging or the like, in the state of FIG. 56C, the protruding portion 5423f causes the leaf spring member 5425 to move. By lifting, the arrangement relationship between the leaf spring member 5425 and the projecting portion 5423f can be maintained. That is, it is possible to prevent the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the gripping portion 5424c from dropping downward.

  Here, a change in the direction of the force generated between the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is disposed at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other. No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

  As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves inward in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (the right side in FIG. 56 (a)), the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the protruding portion 5423f moves to the leaf spring member 5425. It gradually approaches and comes into contact soon (see FIG. 56 (b)). Subsequently, the connecting member 5423 moves inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end of the protruding portion 5423f is gradually moved upward, so that the free end side (the right end side in FIG. 56 (b)) of the leaf spring member 5425. The edge gradually moves upward.

  When the projecting portion 5423f and the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425 are in contact with each other, the force F51 applied to the leaf spring member 5425 from the projecting portion 5423f is applied to the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. It travels in the normal direction of. That is, the force F51 is directed to the thickness direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, the direction in which the leaf spring member 5425 is bent. In this case, of the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction of the force F51, the component directed in the left-right direction is small. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves rightward, The movement of the connecting member 5423 is prevented from being hindered. Thus, while the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position, the insertion shaft portion 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55). can do.

  When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 reaches the inner end (the right end in FIG. 56 (c)) of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction and rebounds, the projecting portion 5423f becomes the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425. (See FIG. 56 (c)).

  In this case, the force F52 applied from the protruding portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is transmitted in the normal direction of the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the curved portion 5425b. That is, the force F52 has a large component directed in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Here, the leaf spring easily elastically deforms in the thickness direction, but hardly elastically deforms in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed to the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the curved portion 5425b to near a right angle to the left-right direction. Accordingly, the resistance of the leaf spring member 5425 against the rebound of the connecting member 5423 can be increased, and the movement of the connecting member 5423 can be prevented. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the inner end (the right side in FIG. 56C) of the guide hole 424b.

  Further, as described above, the protruding portion 5423f is formed such that the corner on the right side in the rear view (the right side in FIG. 56 (c)) is rounded and the corner on the left side in the rear view is formed at a right angle. Thereby, when the right corner of the protruding portion 5423f comes into contact with the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56B), the protruding portion 5423f abuts smoothly (without biting), and the left corner of the protruding portion 5423f in rear view. When the corner comes into contact with the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56C), the projecting portion 5423f bites into the leaf spring member 5425. That is, the left-side corner of the protruding portion 5423f is fitted between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the leaf spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

  By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the driving device 460 (see FIG. 21), the slide shaft 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction. In this case, the protruding portion 5423f pushes and moves the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Next, a composite operation unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring guide arm 480 that guides the wiring is expanded and contracted by folding is described. However, the composite operation unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment is configured such that the wiring guide slide 6480 that guides the wiring can expand and contract by sliding. Formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is located at the extended position. In FIG. 57, the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480 is illustrated. When the wiring guide slide 6480 is in the extended state, the wiring W provided inside the wiring guide slide 6480 has almost no bent portions and is formed substantially linearly. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The wiring guide slide 6480 is pivotally supported about the shaft support 472 and is provided with a first guide slide 6481 in which the wiring W is inserted and a sliding elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481 in the extending direction. A second guide slide 6482 that is slid along and the wiring W is inserted therein, and a third guide that slides along the extending direction of the elongated slide hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and the wiring W is inserted therein. And a slide 6483.

  The first guide slide 6481 includes a rectangular cylindrical main body 6481a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces (front and rear) disposed opposite to each other among the side surfaces of the main body 6481a. And a pair of slide long holes 6481b formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6481a, and a shaft support portion 472 is formed in an end portion of the main body portion 6481a in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a shaft support hole 6481c, and a cylindrical column portion 6481d that is bridged in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the through hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

  The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6481b is formed in parallel with the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body 6481a. The wiring W is wound around the cylindrical portion 6481d from below.

  The second guide slide 6482 has a rectangular cylindrical main body 6482a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction so as to be slidably fitted in the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6481, and the main body 6482a. A pair of sliding long holes 6482b formed facing the pair of side surfaces (side surfaces arranged front and rear) facing each other among the side surfaces of the main body portion 6482a, and a main body portion 6482a And a pair of projecting portions 6482c that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the first guide slide 6481 and are inserted into the slide long holes 6481b of the first guide slide 6481.

  The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b and the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body 6482a are formed in parallel. The projecting portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide elongated hole 6481b.

  The second guide slide 6482 has a protruding portion 6482c formed so as to be slidable inside the elongated slide hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. During the movement, the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is connected to the main body 6481a. Of the through hole 6481a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide slot 6481b of the first guide slide 6481 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a is equal to the distance from the central axis of the protruding portion 6482c to the main body portion 6482a. It is formed substantially equal to the distance from the lower side surface to the outer side surface. Accordingly, when the second guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the first guide slide 6481, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  The third guide slide 6483 is fitted in the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 so as to be slidable and has a substantially cylindrical through hole 6483a1 formed in the longitudinal direction. And a pair of projecting portions 6483b projecting outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483a and inserted through the elongated slide holes 6482b of the second guide slide 6482.

  The third guide slide 6483 has a protrusion 6483b formed so as to be slidable inside the elongated slide hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482. During the movement, the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 is connected to the main body 6482a. Of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the center axis of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 to the inner side of the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is equal to the distance from the center axis of the projecting portion 6483b to the main body portion 6483a. It is formed substantially equal to the distance from the lower side surface to the outer side surface. Thus, when the third guide slide 6483 is slid with respect to the second guide slide 6482, the posture of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  Here, the inner surface of the first guide slide 6481 and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 are formed as smooth surfaces, respectively, while the inner surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 are different from each other. It is formed with a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the second guide slide 6482 with respect to the first guide slide 6481 is formed smaller than the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the third guide slide 6483 with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

  Thus, the second guide slide 6482 slides prior to the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state of FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first stored in the first guide slide 6481, and after the storage is completed, the third guide slide 6482 is stored in the second guide slide 6482. 6483 are stored.

  FIGS. 58A and 58B are partial front views of the composite operation unit 6400. FIG. 58 (a) illustrates a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 58 (b) illustrates a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. You.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the wiring guide slide 6480 does not include a portion where the wiring W may be pinched, so that the wiring W can be prevented from being disconnected. In addition, since there is no possibility of sandwiching the wiring W, the arrangement interval between the wiring W and the inner surface of each guide slide 6481, 6482, 6483 can be reduced. Thereby, the width of the wiring guide slide 6480 in the short direction can be suppressed.

  When the main body member 410 is located at the intermediate position, the wiring W remains inside the wiring guide slide 6480 (see FIG. 58A). Therefore, the tension applied to the wiring W can be temporarily removed.

  Next, a swing operation unit 7500 according to a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridging members 528 is fixed to the drive-side arm member 520 has been described. However, the swing operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment includes the first bridge of the pair of bridging members 7528. A bridging member 7528a is formed to be swingable with respect to the driving arm member 7520. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 59A and 59B are partial front views of the swing operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 59 (a) illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 59 (b) illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. Is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridging member 7528a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridging members 7528, is inserted into a shaft support hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the driving arm member 7520. It is pivotally supported and is urged clockwise in a front view by a torsion spring (not shown). The main body plate portion 7521 is different from the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening holes 527a1 corresponding to the first bridging members 7528a is omitted and a shaft support hole 7529 is formed instead. It is formed similarly. The second bridging member 7528b, which is the larger side of the pair of bridging members 7528, is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520.

  The driven arm member 7530 includes a protruding portion 7534 protruding from the front side of the main body plate portion 531 and abutting on the first bridging member 7528a in the swing direction.

  Here, when the driving side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are disposed at the retracted position and at the extended position, the relative position of the projecting portion 7534 with respect to the shaft support hole 7529 is determined. The position changes (the position changes similarly to the relative movement of the other-side shaft support hole 526 and the other-side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive-side arm member 7520).

  By swinging the first bridging member 7528a along the protruding portion 7534, the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the second bridging member 7528b at the extended position (see FIG. 59B) is increased. Can be spread. Thereby, when the driven side arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions at which the bridge member 7528 can abut (the end of the first bridge member 7528a and the end of the second bridge member 7528b). Can be expanded. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven arm member 7530 can be freely bent without being brought into contact with the bridging member 7528 can be divided into shorter portions, and the amount of bending of the driven arm member 7530 (in the front-rear direction) can be reduced. Movement amount) can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the other-side shaft support hole 533 can be maintained regardless of whether the moving member 540 is located at the retracted position or the extended position. it can. Here, the displacement of the driven-side arm member 7530 with respect to the drive-side arm member 7520 is likely to occur at the other-side shaft support hole 533 which is the connection position with the moving member 540, and the displacement width is likely to be large. In the present embodiment, the first bridge member 7528a can be prevented from separating from the other shaft support hole 533, and the effect of suppressing the displacement of the driven arm member 7530 with respect to the drive arm member 7520 can be increased. Can be.

  When the drive-side arm member 7520 and the driven-side arm member 7530 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 59A), the first bridge member 7528a is biased by a torsion spring (not shown). It swings in a direction approaching the second bridging member 7528b. As a result, the drive side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the space between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b is widened, and the first bridge member 7528a and the other shaft support hole 533 are moved. Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

  Next, a game board 8013 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where light is irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described. However, the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment has an outer rail formed by being planted on the base plate 8060. Light is radiated to the vicinity of the upper half of 62. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a front view of a game board 8013 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed outside the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced by a shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. In addition, since the light irradiation device 8610 is provided in the embedding hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, it is possible to prevent the light irradiation device 8610 from increasing the thickness of the game board 8013 in the front-rear direction.

  The light irradiating device 8610 irradiates light inside the game area through the back side of the outer rail 62. A mechanism for changing the traveling direction of the irradiated light to the front side (the front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 8013 taken along the line LXI-LXI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body 8611 fixed to the embedding hole 8013a, and a light irradiation unit 8612 disposed on a side surface of the main body 8611.

  The game board 8013 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has an embedded hole 8013a in which the light irradiating device 8610 is provided, and a lower portion extending from the embedded hole 8013a along the rear surface of the game board 8013 beyond the outer rail 62 (see FIG. A light projecting passage 8013b, which is a concave portion extending to the inside of the game area), and a light emitting path 8013b formed at an extended end of the light projecting path 8013b such that it approaches the front side as it goes downward (inward of the game area). And a direction change portion 8013c formed in an inclined manner.

  The embedding hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape in a resin mold.

  The path E81 of the light emitted from the light irradiating section 8612 is formed inside the light projecting path 8013b, reaches the direction changing section 8013c and is reflected, so that the traveling direction of the light is from the path E81 to the front side (FIG. 61). The route changes to a route E82 toward the left side. Here, since the direction change portion 8013c that changes the traveling direction of light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of a light-transmissive resin material, the direction change portion 8013c is inconspicuous, and it is possible to reduce the influence on the decoration of the game area. it can. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling on the route E82 is applied from below to a nail implanted in front of the game board 8013. This makes it possible to brighten the shadow formed below the nail due to the illumination of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance ability in the area below the nail, and to make it easier to see the ball when the ball passes through the area below the nail, thereby reducing the burden felt by the player due to the difficulty in seeing the ball. be able to.

  In particular, the nails implanted on the upper part of the game board 8013 are arranged at positions where the nails are looked up from the player, so that light is radiated from below the nails to direct the light reflected by the nails to the player. be able to. In this manner, the nail that defines the flow path of the sphere can be used as a member for producing light.

  The lower part (lower half) of the nail is less likely to collide with the ball, so that even if the processing is performed, the influence on the flow of the ball is small. For example, by processing the lower part (lower half) of the nail in a crystal shape, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the performance of the nail can be enhanced.

  In addition, by setting the color of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 to a color (for example, red) different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow), the nail that has been irradiated and the other nails are distinguished. Can be made easier.

  In this case, for example, a plurality of light irradiation devices 8610 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60) may be arranged on the game board 8013, and light may be irradiated in order. That is, after light is emitted from the leftmost light irradiation device 8610 in front view, light is emitted from the right (the second from the leftmost in front view) light irradiation device 8610, and then to the right (front Light may be emitted from the light irradiating device 8610 (third from the left end when viewed), and may continue thereafter.

  According to this, the nails implanted in the game board 8013 shine in order along the curved arrow R81 by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610. For example, in the case where it is advantageous for the player to perform right-handing, the nails implanted in the game board 8013 are sequentially lit along the curved arrow R81 so that the player performs right-handing. Can be signaled. Thereby, the nail that forms the flow path of the ball is given an effect of telling the player where to hit the ball, so that the attention of the nail can be improved.

  The light irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to the nail. For example, light may be applied to a windmill disposed on the game board 8613, the through gate 67 (see FIG. 60), or the like.

  Next, a wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction other than at the pivot portion, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment. The overhanging front locking portion 9482f provided on the second guide arm 9482 overlaps the first guide arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 62 to 64, the illustration of the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 is omitted for easy understanding.

  FIG. 62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9481 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. It is a perspective view of locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62A, the detachable front locking member 9481f is partially viewed in cross section, and the fitting portion between the attachment portion 9481d and the removable front locking member 9481f can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 includes a detachable front locking member 9481f formed detachably on the attachment portion 9481d, and a plate-shaped arm portion 9481a from both ends of the linear portion of the attachment portion 9481d. It mainly includes a plate-shaped non-slip plate portion 9481g extending toward the rear side, and another side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extending from the back side of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

  In the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a, the formation of the notch portion 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. In the present embodiment, since the detachable front locking member 9481f is molded separately from the attachment portion 9481d as described later, the notch portion 481a1 is unnecessary. Thereby, the strength of the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the attachment portion 9481d includes a fitting recess 9481d1 which is a semicircular recess extending in the front-rear direction.

  The fitting dent 9481d1 is a semicircular dent into which a cylindrical fitting arm 9481f2 of a detachable front locking member 9481f described later is fitted, and has a short side direction of the attachment part 9481d (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the sheet surface). Direction). Thus, a shape for the fitting recess 9481d1 is added to the molding die of the attachment portion 9481d, and the fitting portion 9481d1 is extracted in one direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 62A), whereby the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed. 9481d can be easily manufactured.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius equal to or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm 9481f2. Thus, the fitting arm 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the sliding movement of the detachable front locking member 9481f in the longitudinal direction of the attachment 9481d can be suppressed.

  In this case, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm 9481f2 can be increased as compared with the case where the attachment portion 9481d and the fitting arm 9481f2 abut on each other, and the frictional force can be increased. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from dropping off from the attachment portion 9481d.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f includes a long plate-shaped main body plate 9481f1 and a plurality of columnar members vertically extending from side surfaces in the thickness direction of the main body plate 9481f1. And a fitting arm 9481f2.

  Since the detachable front locking member 9481f can be detached from the attachment portion 9481d, when the wiring W is replaced, for example, when the wiring W is disconnected, the detachable front locking member 9481f is detached to allow the detachable front locking. The labor for replacing the wiring W while avoiding the member 9481f can be omitted, and the replacement of the wiring W can be facilitated.

  The plurality of fitting arms 9481f2 are portions for fixing the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d by sandwiching the attachment portion 9481d, and are juxtaposed at intervals slightly shorter than the plate thickness of the attachment portion 9481d. A pair of rod-shaped members are continuously provided in two sets. When the detachable front locking member 9481f is fixed to the attachment portion 9481d, the pair of bar-shaped members of the plurality of fitting arms 9481f2 are elastically deformed by being pushed from the attachment portion 9481d, and the attachment portion is elastically restored by the elastic recovery force. 9481d.

  The length of the fitting arm 9481f2 is formed to be slightly longer than the length of the attachment portion 9481f in the width direction, and the tip of the fitting arm 9481f2 is directed toward the mating arm 9481f2 of the mating side that clamps the attachment 9481f. A protruding portion 9481f3 is formed. Since the projecting portion 9481f3 is hooked on the attachment portion 9481f, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from coming off the attachment portion 9481f to the front side (the front side in FIG. 62A).

  In this case, the fitting arm 9481f2 is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed as a semicircular recess. Therefore, when the fitting arm 9481f2 clamps the attachment portion 9481d with elastic recovery force. The axial center of the fitting arm 9481f2 is moved to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. This facilitates positioning when attaching the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d, and shortens the time required for attachment.

  The non-slip plate portion 9481g is a portion that sandwiches the wiring W between the plate-like arm portion 481a and is formed continuously in the width direction of the attachment portion 9481d (the vertical direction in FIG. 62B). The attachment portion 9481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be elastically deformed in the thickness direction. The gap between the tip end of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is usually formed so as to have a thickness equal to or less than the thickness of the wiring W, and the anti-slip plate portion 9481g is inserted by inserting the wiring W therethrough. The wire W is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force suppresses the wiring W from sliding with respect to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

  The direction of the non-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged to be elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. Accordingly, the wiring W can be sandwiched between the non-slip plate portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the width direction, and the wiring W can be suppressed from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

  The directions of the pair of non-slip plate portions 9481g are opposite to each other at both ends of the attachment portion 9481d. Accordingly, regardless of the moving direction of the wiring W, it is possible to suppress the attachment portion 9481d and the wiring W from moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The non-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged to face the rib portion N. Accordingly, the wiring W can be suppressed not at the tip end of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g but at the middle part (antinode), so that the resistance applied to the wiring W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

  The other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-shaped portion having the same outer peripheral shape as the other-side bottom portion 481e2. The other-side auxiliary bottom portion 481c2 extends in the circumferential direction of the other-side cylindrical portion 481c from the back surface of the other-side bottom portion 481e2. Is extended at about 120 degrees around the axis, and an inclined side surface 9481h1 is provided at the leading end of the extension. As shown in FIG. 64A, the extending tip of the other-side auxiliary bottom 9481h and the end of the one-side bottom 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in a front view. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from dropping to the back side (the back side in FIG. 64A).

  The inclined side surface 9481h1 is inclined to the rear side (downward in FIG. 62 (b)) as the distance from the other side bottom portion 481e2 increases.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 9482, FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 9482, and FIG. 63 (c) is an LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm 9482 in the -LXIIIc line.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 includes a projecting front locking portion 9482f extending from the front end of the attachment portion 482d in both the thickness direction of the attachment portion 482d, and an attachment portion. 482d and a non-slip plate portion 9482g extending from the end of the linear portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a to the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d that are arranged to face each other.

  The overhanging front locking portion 9482f is attached to the extension end portion extending on the opposite side of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a across the attachment portion 482d, and the rear side as the extension tip approaches the attachment portion 482 (FIG. 63). (C) An inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right side is provided.

  Since the technical idea of the anti-slip plate portion 9482g is the same as the technical idea of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g, the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is the LXIVc- of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in LXIVc line. FIG. 64A shows a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded, and FIG. 64B shows a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are pivoted and opened. The state where it was put is illustrated. 64 (a) and 64 (b) show the wiring W, and FIG. 64 (c) does not show the wiring W.

  Here, it is desirable to suppress the arrangement area of the wiring guide arm 9480 in order to secure the arrangement area of another movable accessory. For this reason, it is difficult to provide a margin in a region for accommodating the wiring W (for example, between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481). In this case, when the wiring guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, each time the state changes, the wiring W rubs against the inner surface of the wiring guide arm 9480, and the wiring W deteriorates early and the durability of the wiring W decreases. May drop.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the present embodiment, the wiring W is sandwiched between the non-slip plates 9481g and 9482g and the plate-shaped arms 481a and 482a, so that the wiring W is connected to the plate-shaped arms 481a. , 482a and attachment portions 9481d, 482d. Thereby, the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

  When the second guide arm 9482 is deformed in a twisted manner with respect to the first guide arm 9481, the wiring W is also twisted, and the durability of the wiring W may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the present embodiment, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is connected to the second guide arm. It overlaps with one side bottom part 482e1 of 9482 in the front-back direction. Here, the other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extends in the circumferential direction of the other-side cylindrical portion 481c along the back surface of the other-side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 62B).

  Therefore, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in a positional relationship in which they can abut in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed against the first guide arm 9481 in a direction of pressing the one side bottom 482e1 against the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h, the one side bottom 482e1 and the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h abut. In addition, the deformation resistance of the torsional deformation increases. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be suppressed from being twisted. Therefore, the wire W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wire W can be ensured.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the overhang front locking portion 9482f moves forward and backward with the attachment portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481. It overlaps in the direction, and is formed in a positional relationship in which it can abut in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 64 (c)). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted with respect to the first guide arm 9481 in the direction of pressing the overhanging front locking portion 9482f against the attachment portion 9481d, the overhanging front engagement portion 9482f and the attachment portion 9481d are brought into contact with each other. And the deformation resistance of the torsional deformation increases. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be suppressed from being twisted. Therefore, the wire W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wire W can be ensured.

  Further, when the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from the present embodiment, the second guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded in the second state (see FIG. 64A). The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom part 9481h are in contact, and the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front locking part 9482f are in contact.

  In this case, since the back side of the second guide arm 9482 is in contact with the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, it is possible to prevent the front side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9481 is in contact with the overhanging front locking portion 9482f, it is possible to prevent the rear side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. Therefore, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the second guide arm 9482 is twisted with respect to the first guide arm 9481 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

  The same effect can be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. Since the guide arm 9482 is sandwiched between the first and second guide arms 9481 and 9482, the positioning accuracy of the first and second guide arms 9481 and 9482 needs to be increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion for suppressing the twist of the second guide arm 9482 is formed so as to be shifted in the longitudinal direction of the second guide arm 9482, so that the alignment of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 is performed. The degree required for the accuracy of the image can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (FIG. 64A), and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (FIG. 64). (See (b)), there is a possibility that the extension end of the other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h may contact the end surface of the one-side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482.

  On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9481h1 (see FIG. 62 (a)) at the extension end of the other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, the extension end of the other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is brought into contact with the end surface of the one-side bottom portion 482e1. Even in the case of contact, the other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can ride on the back side of the one-side bottom portion 482e1 (the back side in FIG. 64B). This makes it easy to form the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 in an open state (see FIG. 64A).

  Further, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (from FIG. 64 (b)) to the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (FIG. 64 (a)). (See Reference), there is a possibility that the extended distal end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may come into contact with the side surface of the attachment portion 9481d.

  On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63 (c)) at the extension tip of the overhang front locking portion 9482f, the extension tip of the overhang front locking portion 9482f is attached to the attachment portion 9481d. Even in the case of contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be run on the front side of the attachment portion 9481d (the front side of the drawing in FIG. 64A) (see FIG. 64C). This makes it easy to form the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 in a folded state (see FIG. 64A).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the overhanging front locking portion 9482f abutting on the attachment portion 9481d is formed on the front side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair of a front side and a back side. Thereby, regardless of the direction of the torsional deformation of the second guide arm 9482, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be brought into contact with the attachment portion 9481d, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are twisted and deformed. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the gap is formed by swinging the pair of decorative members 422 of the combined operation unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decoration member 422 may be guided so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and the pair of decoration members 422 may slide in the direction away from each other to form a gap for accommodating the swing member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be secured in the vertical direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the movable upper cover member 332 of the lower panel unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of left and right long plate-shaped movable members are pivotally supported on the inner side surfaces of the pair of step portions 324a, and the movable members are in the direction in which the pair of step portions 324a are continuously provided. In a closed state in which the ball is arranged in a position along the longitudinal direction to prevent passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and an opening that swings upward or downward from that state to allow the ball to pass to the specific winning opening 65a. And the state may be formed. Further, the second winning opening 640 may be configured instead of the specific winning opening 65a with the same configuration.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the movable upper cover member 332 of the lower panel unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, a portion that reflects light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the front side when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the extended state may be formed below the movable upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the light effect can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the positioning portion 543 is combined with the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 by the concave and convex fitting is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be provided at a position where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be united by magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by the magnetic force, and it is not necessary to generate the holding force in the driving device 550 when the moving members 540 are arranged at the extended positions. Therefore, power consumption of the driving device 550 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide hole 413 of the combined operation unit 400 is formed in a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, the swing speed of the shielding member 420 can be made slower or faster.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 swings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the swing member 430 may include a slide member that slides in a direction away from the main body member 410, and the decoration member 422 may be accommodated between the slide member and the main body member 410.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the respective guide arms of the wiring guide arms 480 of the composite operation unit 400 are vertically stacked has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each guide arm of the wiring guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be reduced, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 necessary for housing the wiring guide arm 480 outside the opening 211a can be reduced. Thereby, the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 can be enlarged.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving member 540 is supported by the pair of arm members of the drive side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, 7520 and the driven side arm members 530, 7530 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by three or more arm members. In this case, for example, the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528 are fastened and fixed to the intermediate arm members, and are disposed so as to cover the front sides of the arm members at both ends, thereby suppressing the positional deviation between the arm members. Can be improved. That is, when one of the arm members at both ends pushes one end of the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528, and the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528 bend, the other end becomes the other end. It moves toward the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. As described above, the arm members at both ends act to suppress the bending of the bridging members 528, 2528, and 7528, so that the displacement of the plurality of arm members can be suppressed, and the posture of the moving member 540 can be stabilized. Can be done.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment described above, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 includes a columnar portion (for example, one side support 482b) and a cylindrical portion ( For example, although the case where it is pivotally supported by the other cylindrical portion 481c) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the portion supporting the columnar portion may be formed by a long hole extending in the longitudinal direction of each of the guide arms 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to the vertical expansion and contraction in which the respective guide arms 481 to 483 are bent, the horizontal expansion and contraction in which the respective guide arms 481 to 483 slide in the extending direction of the elongated hole can be performed.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) constituting the wiring guide arm 480. Has described that the width is shorter than the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) may be wider than the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d). In this case, it is possible to suppress the wiring W from slipping down from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) due to gravity.

  Although the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment have described the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than the attachment portions 481d and 9481d from the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be longer than the width of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. In this case, a portion of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the protruding portion can be pinched (fingered by a finger) to easily take out the wiring W. Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

  In the seventh and ninth embodiments from the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the case where the widths of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d are constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, portions of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d other than the portion where the front locking portion 481f is fixed may be formed with the same width as the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a part of the wiring W can protrude from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the wire W can be easily taken out by pinching (protruding with the finger) the protruding portion with the finger. Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the concave portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the upper surface of the guide hole 4424b may be thicker than the thickness of the lower surface. In this case, the friction generated between the upper surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be made larger than the friction generated between the lower surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423. The rebound of the connecting member 423 that occurs when the connecting member 423 moves to the position can be suppressed.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the concave portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a recess capable of accommodating the slide shaft portion 423e may be formed on the upper side surface of the lower end of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. In this case, when the insertion shaft 421c is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied to the insertion shaft 421c from the side surface of the guide hole 413 can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction changing portion 8013c is provided only at the extending end of the light projecting passage 8013b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a direction change portion 8013c may be additionally provided in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b. In this case, the light reflected to the front side from the direction changing portion 8013c disposed in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b and the light transmitted through the direction changing portion 8013c and disposed at the extending end of the light projecting passage 8013b. The light can be divided into light reflected from the direction changing unit 8013c and light reflected frontward. That is, since the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of light components, the number of light beams visible in a front view can be larger than the number of light irradiation devices 8610. Accordingly, the number of light irradiation devices 8610 can be reduced while maintaining the effect of the light irradiation device 8610.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<An example of a technical idea in which a moving member is housed between a member that moves forward and a base member>
A first moving member movably formed between a retracted position formed outside the liquid crystal display device and an extended position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and relatively movable with the first moving member; And a second moving member disposed on the front side of the first moving member, wherein the first moving member forms an overlapping portion overlapping the second moving member in a front view, In a gaming machine in which the area of the superimposed portion is larger when the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position than when the first moving member is arranged at the extended position, the first moving member may have a front surface. And an auxiliary member that is disposed on the side and is formed so as to be movable in a direction approaching and moving away from the first moving member, and wherein the first moving member is disposed in a state where the first moving member is located at a retracted position. The second moving member is housed between the Gaming machine A1, wherein is that the.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of moving members are arranged in front and rear, and in a retracted position, a superimposed portion to be overlapped is formed to be large, and the area of the plurality of moving members that can be viewed from the front is reduced, while In the exit position, there is a gaming machine in which the superimposition portion is formed smaller than the evacuation position to ensure a large effect area (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to avoid interference between the front-side moving member and the rear-side moving member, the overlap portion is formed flat particularly at the retracted position of the rear-side moving member. Therefore, the effect of the moving member on the back side at the overhang position is limited to a planar effect, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Here, as a method of solving the effect that the effect is limited to a planar one, for example, a method of three-dimensionally forming the moving member on the front side toward the front side can be considered. However, in this case, since the space on the front side of the moving member on the front side is limited, it is not possible to form a front-back difference enough to form the moving member on the back side three-dimensionally.

  Also, as a method of solving the effect that the effect is limited to a planar one, for example, a portion that does not overlap with the front-side moving member is formed on the rear-side moving member, and at that point, the rear-side moving member moves from the front to the front. A method is conceivable in which a member that moves in a direction approaching and moving away is provided. However, in this case, the portion of the rear-side moving member provided as a portion that does not overlap with the front-side moving member protrudes outward from the front-side moving member when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. This makes it difficult to reduce the arrangement space when the front-side moving member and the rear-side moving member are arranged at the retracted position, and it is impossible to secure a space for disposing the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the auxiliary member is arranged on the front side of the first moving member so as to be movable in a direction approaching and moving away from the first moving member, and the first moving member is arranged at the retreat position. In this state, the second moving member can be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interference between the auxiliary member provided on the first moving member and the second moving member, to reduce the arrangement space for these members, and to arrange the auxiliary member on the front side of the second moving member. A three-dimensional effect can be performed by using a large front and rear space as compared with the case where the display is provided.

  Further, in the extended state in which the second moving member is not accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the auxiliary member is disposed close to the first moving member, so that the distance between the first moving member and the auxiliary member is increased. Can be suppressed, and it is easy to arrange another member on the front side of the auxiliary member.

  The mode of movement of the auxiliary member is not particularly limited, and may be a mode in which the moving direction is formed as a single axis such as sliding movement, a mode in which a rotation axis is defined and the rotation is performed around the rotation axis, or a combination thereof. good.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first moving member includes a first support portion that supports the auxiliary member, and the first support portion is configured such that the first moving member is moved toward a retreat position and the second moving member is moved. An end opposite to the end where the member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member is supported, and a driving force is applied to a point near the first support with the first support as a fulcrum. The gaming machine A2, wherein the end portion of the auxiliary member on the side of the second moving member moves in a direction approaching and moving away from the first moving member by swinging the auxiliary member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, the end of the auxiliary member on the side of the second moving member is separated from the first moving member by the swinging operation of the auxiliary member about the first support portion. By doing so, a space for accommodating the second moving member is formed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member.

  Here, the first support portion is configured to move the first moving member toward the retracted position and swing the end opposite to the end where the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Support movably. Therefore, even if the amount of operation of the auxiliary member in the first support portion is small, the amount of operation of the end of the auxiliary member on the side that houses the second moving member can be increased.

  In this case, by applying a driving force to a point near the first support portion of the auxiliary member to swing the auxiliary member, the second moving member can be compared with the drive distance of the point near the first support portion of the auxiliary member. The end of the auxiliary member on the side that accommodates the first moving member can be largely separated from the first moving member.

  Therefore, contact between the second moving member and the auxiliary member can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to achieve both suppression of the driving distance of the auxiliary member and prevention of contact between the second moving member and the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the side surface of the second moving member facing the auxiliary member has an end nearer to the first support portion than the first support portion. A gaming machine A3 which is arranged closer to the first moving member than an end.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, when the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the gaming machine A2 comes close to the first support portion of the second moving member. It starts to be accommodated from the side end, that is, the end located close to the first moving member. Therefore, when the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, it is possible to secure an interval between the second moving member and the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second moving member from colliding with the first moving member or the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machines A2 and A3, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members movably supported by a second supporting portion formed at an end on the side away from the auxiliary member. The two moving members are each formed so as to be movable in a direction away from the auxiliary member, and are formed so as to be able to accommodate at least a part of the auxiliary member between the pair of second moving members by the moving operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized by the following.

  Here, for example, when a mechanism for swinging the auxiliary member is disposed on the front side of the first moving member, the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member is increased (first area). In order to move the first moving member and the second moving member in the moving direction of the moving member), it is conceivable to arrange the second moving member on the front side of the mechanism. On the other hand, in this case, it is necessary to move the auxiliary member accommodating the second moving member to the front side (in a direction away from the first moving member), so that the space on the front side of the auxiliary member is suppressed, and It is difficult to form three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A2 and A3, at least a part of the auxiliary member is accommodated in a space generated when the pair of second moving members are separated from each other. Can be. Thus, for example, it is not necessary to move the second moving member to the front side of the mechanism of the auxiliary member in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. It can be arranged close to the first moving member. Thereby, the auxiliary member can be formed three-dimensionally on the front side.

  The gaming machine A5, wherein in any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first support portion is disposed on a side of the auxiliary member close to the liquid crystal display device.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first support portion is provided on the auxiliary member on the side close to the liquid crystal display device. In this case, the first moving member is disposed at the retracted position and the auxiliary member is swung in a direction away from the first moving member, so that the display surface formed on the auxiliary member is inward of the liquid crystal display device (game Side). Accordingly, when the first moving member is moved to the retreat position, the display surface of the auxiliary member can be directed to the player side, and the effect of the auxiliary member can be improved. Therefore, the first support portion is provided for the purpose of increasing the interval between the ends of the first moving member and the auxiliary member on the side where the second moving member starts to be accommodated, and for the purpose of turning the display surface of the auxiliary member toward the player. It can be shared.

<An example of the technical idea to suppress the bounce of the moving member>
A first moving member formed to be movable, a base member formed to be relatively movable with the first moving member, and a second moving member having one end connected to the first moving member so as to be able to be guided. A connecting member, one end of which is supported by the other end of the second moving member and the other end of which is guideably connected to the base member; and a driving force for moving the first moving member. A driving device for generating the first moving member, the second moving member and the connecting member are moved by the movement of the first moving member, and one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member is moved. When one of the ends reaches the end position of the range in which one is guided, the other end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member is connected to the other end of the second moving member. And the support point of the one end of the connecting member Gaming machine B1, characterized in that guided in the direction including the dynamic direction of the vertical component.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first moving member, a second moving member having one end connected to the first moving member so as to be able to be guided, and one end connected to the other end of the second moving member. A connecting member having an end supported and the other end connected to the base member so as to be able to be guided, and a driving device for driving the first moving member, wherein the second moving member and the connection are connected by moving the first moving member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is moved and arranged at different timings at end positions of a range in which one end of the second moving member and the other end of the connecting member are guided (for example, JP-A-2008-2008). 194313). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first moving member is moved, the end of the movable range is first reached at one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member. When the end reaches the end position of the movable range, the support point at the other end of the second moving member and one end of the connecting member rebounds in the direction opposite to the moving direction up to that point. In this case, there is a problem that the arrangement of the second moving member and the connecting member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when one of the one end of the second moving member and the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position of the range in which the second moving member is guided, The other end of the one end or the other end of the connecting member is guided in a direction including a vertical component of the moving direction of the supporting point of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member. You. Thereby, the direction in which the support point of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member rebounds, and the direction in which the one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member guides. They cross and a resistance is generated in the second moving member or the connecting member. The resistance prevents the support points at the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member from bouncing. Therefore, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

  The connecting member and the second moving member may be fixed at a point where they are supported by each other. That is, the connecting member and the second moving member may be configured to be integrally handled.

  In the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guide path for guiding the other end of the connection member, and the guide path is configured such that the other end of the connection member is at least one of the guide paths of the base member. When the support point bounces when reaching the end position of the connecting member, the side surface that receives the other end of the connecting member suppresses the movement of the other end of the connecting member along the guide path. A gaming machine B2 comprising a unit.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guide path for guiding the other end of the connecting member. The guide path is connected to a side surface that receives the other end of the connecting member when the other end of the connecting member reaches at least one end position in the guide direction of the base member and the support point rebounds. A braking unit is provided for suppressing movement of the other end of the member along the guide path.

  Therefore, while suppressing the resistance of the connecting member in the guiding direction until the other end of the connecting member reaches the terminal position in the guiding direction of the base member, the other end of the connecting member is guided by the base member. After reaching the end position in the direction, an effect of braking the other end of the connecting member can be produced.

  In addition, as the braking portion formed on the side surface of the guide path, a concave portion capable of partially receiving the other end of the connecting member, a high friction portion having increased frictional resistance by embossing, a spring member For example, a spring portion or the like to which an elastic force is applied.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members arranged in parallel in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point, and the one end of the second moving member is guided. A gaming machine B3, wherein a direction of a direction component perpendicular to a direction of movement of the support point in the direction of movement is opposite to each other between the pair of second moving members.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the direction of the direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the guide direction of one end of the second moving member is one pair. Are formed in opposite directions to each other. Therefore, as one end of the pair of second moving members is guided and moved by the first moving member, a load is applied to the other end of the second moving member along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point. Power is offset. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the other end of the second moving member from being displaced in the vertical direction of the moving direction of the support point during the movement of the first moving member. Therefore, the second moving member can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the base member includes a pair of guide paths for guiding the other end of the connecting member, and the connecting member is guided by the separate guide paths at the other end. The pair of connecting members, the pair of connecting members, when the other end reaches the end position of the guide path, respectively, the other end of the connecting member along the guide path A gaming machine B4, wherein, among reboundable directions, directional components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point are opposite to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the terminal position of the guide path of the base member, the other of the connecting members The components perpendicular to the direction of movement of the support point in the directions in which the end of the support point can rebound along the guide path are opposite to each other.

  In this case, the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the terminal position of the guide path of the base member, and the support point of the pair of connecting members with the second moving member is in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction up to that point. When the movement (position shift) starts, one of the pair of connecting members is pressed against the end of the guide path of the base member, and the movement resistance of the pair of connecting members increases. Therefore, the support point between the second moving member and the pair of connecting members is prevented from being moved (positionally displaced) in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction up to that point. Thereby, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B4, the pair of connecting members has an intermediate portion formed between the one end and the other end, and the intermediate portion formed between the one end and the other end of the connecting member. A gaming machine B5, wherein the gaming machine B5 is disposed on a side away from the second moving member as compared to a straight line connecting the gaming machines.

  Here, for example, when the connecting member is formed from a linear plate-shaped member, when the pair of connecting members is disposed at the terminal position on the side protruding inward of the liquid crystal display device, one of the connecting members is formed. Is moved, the distance between the connecting member and the second moving member is reduced, and the connecting member and the second moving member may come into contact with each other.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B4, the intermediate portion of the connecting member is second compared to a straight line connecting one end and the other end of the pair of connecting members. It is arranged on the side away from the moving member.

  Therefore, when the pair of connecting members is disposed at the end position of the movable range on the side protruding inward of the liquid crystal display device, even if one end of the connecting member is moved, the connecting member and the second A sufficient distance from the moving member can be ensured, and the connecting member can be prevented from contacting the second moving member. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the second moving member can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members, and the one end of the second moving member is arranged at at least one end position in the guiding direction. The gaming machine B6, wherein the pair of second moving members are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, one end of the pair of second moving members is disposed at at least one end position in the guiding direction, respectively. Is in contact with the second moving member. Therefore, the displacement of one of the pair of second moving members can be corrected by contact with the other second moving member. That is, a relationship is formed in which the pair of second moving members correct each other's positional deviation, so that the arrangement of the second moving members can be stabilized.

<An example of the technical idea in which the wiring is arranged along the movable member>
In a gaming machine including a movable member movably formed and wiring connected to the movable member, one end is connected to the movable member, and the other end is provided outside the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine C1 comprising a wiring auxiliary member connected to a rear case and formed to be extendable and contracted, wherein the wiring is provided along the wiring auxiliary member.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which electric wiring is disposed without support from a rear case to a moving member (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-245160). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the moving member moves, the wiring takes an unexpected arrangement, for example, the wiring rubs with other members, or the wiring is sandwiched by other members, resulting in a durable endurance. There was a problem that sex could fall.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the wiring is provided along the wiring auxiliary member connecting the rear case and the moving member, so that the wiring arrangement can be predicted, and the wiring can be connected to other members. Rubbing and pinching of the wiring by other members can be prevented. Thereby, the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In addition, as a mode of expansion / contraction, the case where it expands / contracts in a folding type, the case where it expands / contracts in a slide type, the case where it expands / contracts in a bellows, etc. are illustrated.

  Examples of the wiring include a round wiring, a flat harness, and the like. The flat harness has an advantage that it can be easily set to bend around a certain axis as compared with a round wire.

  In the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of arm members, and the arm members include a long bar-shaped connecting rod portion and a short side of the connecting rod portion at at least one end of the connecting rod portion. A support portion formed in a columnar or cylindrical shape having a shaft in a direction and rotatably supporting the arm members, wherein the wiring is arranged in a manner to go around the support portion. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member is formed of a plurality of arm members rotatably supported by the support portion formed at the end, and the wiring is formed by the support portion. Is arranged so as to go around, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from being bent at an acute angle due to the rotation of the arm members.

  In the gaming machine C2, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and the pair of side wall portions is arranged vertically, and formed below the pair of side wall portions. The width of the side wall portion to be formed is made longer than the width of the side wall portion formed above, and the width of at least one side wall portion is made shorter than the width dimension of the wiring. .

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, it is possible to easily attach and detach the wiring at the time of manufacturing and repairing the gaming machine.

  Here, in order to easily attach and detach the wiring from the arm member, it is effective to make the width of the pair of side walls of the arm member equal to or smaller than the width of the wiring member and to protrude the wiring member from the arm member. . However, if the width of the side wall portion is too short, the wiring may fall off from the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, at least one of the side walls has a width shorter than the width of the wiring, and the width of the side wall formed below is longer than the width of the side wall formed above. It is formed. Thereby, the area of the side wall portion of the arm member that supports the wiring pressed down by gravity is secured, and the wiring can be easily attached to and detached from the arm member while preventing the wiring from dropping from the arm member. .

  In the gaming machine C3, the plurality of arm members include a bottom connecting one end of the pair of side walls in the short direction, and the wiring is a concave cross-section formed by the bottom and the side wall. And the support portion includes a lid member disposed at a front end opposite to the bottom portion, and the lid member is disposed at least from the support portion to face the support portion and connects the wiring to the support portion. A gaming machine C4 extending to a position overlapping with the wiring toward the side wall portion sandwiched between the game machine C4 and the game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the arm member forms a concave cross section with the pair of side wall portions and the bottom portion, the wiring is accommodated in the concave cross section portion, and the lid member is disposed at the tip portion opposite to the bottom portion of the support portion. Is done. The lid member extends from at least the support portion to a side wall portion which is disposed to face the support portion and sandwiches the wiring between the support portion and the wiring member, to a position overlapping the wiring. Thus, even if the wiring is likely to fall off from the pair of side wall portions, the lid member is caught by the wiring.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C3, the wiring is bent in the radial direction of the rotation axis due to the rotation of the arm members, and the wiring is likely to be displaced in the support portion. The lid member can prevent the wiring from falling off from the arm member.

  In addition, by disposing the lid members on the support portions where the pair of arm members are supported by each other, the number of the disposed lid members can be reduced. That is, when the lid member is formed in the middle of the arm member, it is necessary to form the lid member on each of the pair of arm members, and the number of the disposed lid members is required by the number of the arm members. On the other hand, by disposing the lid member on the support portion, the number of the disposed lid members can be reduced by one from the number of the plurality of arm members to be connected.

  In the gaming machine C4, the length in the longitudinal direction of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other is formed to be different from or greater than the length of the lid member formed along the longitudinal direction of the arm member. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the length of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other is different from the length of the lid member formed along the longitudinal direction of the arm members. Therefore, it is possible to shift the arrangement of the lid members fixed to the support portions of the adjacently arranged arm members in the longitudinal direction of the arm member. Therefore, when the adjacent arm members are arranged close to each other, it is possible to suppress interference between the lid members. In this case, both disposing the arm member in a space-saving manner and preventing the wiring from falling off by enlarging the lid member can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the arm member may include a shaft bottom extending from the connecting rod portion side beyond the support portion along a longitudinal direction of the bottom portion, and a periphery of the support portion. A wall portion formed in a wall shape, wherein the arm member is rotatably supported on the support portion in a rotatable manner, and the shaft bottom portion is formed in a rotation direction in which the arm members supported on each other are separated from each other. When arranged at the terminal position, the arm member is formed so as to be capable of abutting in the rotation direction of the arm member, and the wall portion is disposed at a terminal position in the rotation direction in which the arm members supported by each other are separated from each other. A game machine C6, wherein a gap is formed in the rotation direction of the arm member when the arm member rotates.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the arm members are rotatably supported at the support portion so that the arm members extend from the connecting rod portion side along the longitudinal direction of the bottom portion so that the shaft bottom portion exceeds the support portion. Formed. Therefore, the arm members supported by each other are rotated beyond the state where the arm members are arranged in a straight line by the shaft bottom portions of the support portions abutting on the terminal positions in the rotation direction in which the arm members are separated from each other. Is prevented.

  Thereby, according to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the rotation angle of the arm member is defined, and the bending of the wiring in the opposite direction is restricted, so that the wiring is disconnected. Can be prevented.

  Since a gap is formed in the wall in the turning direction at the end position in the turning direction in which the arm members are separated from each other, even if the wiring is bent and approaches the wall, the wiring is sandwiched by the wall. Disconnection can be prevented.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the contracted state of the wiring auxiliary member is suppressed compared to the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the extended state of the auxiliary member. A gaming machine C7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the contracted state of the wiring auxiliary member causes the rotation generated in the support portion near the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Since it is suppressed as compared with the friction, when the moving member moves in a mode of deforming the wiring auxiliary member from the contracted state to the extended state, it is possible to suppress the resistance generated in the support portion, and the movement of the moving member Required driving force can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the moving member moves at a high speed and the wiring auxiliary member approaches an extended state, the rotational friction at the support portion increases, so that the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member can be reduced. Thus, the wiring auxiliary member reaches the extended state while the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member is high, and it is possible to suppress the pair of arm members from being bent to the opposite side by vigor.

  In addition, as a method of changing the rotational friction in the support portion according to the state of the wiring auxiliary member, a depression or a hole is provided partially on the sliding surface of the column and the cylinder of the support portion to suppress contact with each other, and the column is provided. And a method of changing the area where the depression or hole formed in the cylinder overlaps on the sliding surface depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member. In this case, the smaller the area where the depressions and holes formed in the column and the cylinder of the support portion overlap on the sliding surface is, the more the rotational friction can be suppressed. (The more the depressions and holes overlap, the more the contact area between the column and the cylinder becomes. And the rotational friction increases).

  Here, for example, when a hollow is formed in the cylinder and the column by a half circumference, if the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column completely overlap, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the column in the remaining half circumference. On the other hand, if the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column do not overlap, the hollow is formed over the entire circumference of the sliding surface, so that the rotational friction is suppressed over the entire circumference. Further, when the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the column partially overlap, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the column in an area smaller than half a circumference. Thus, by changing the formation range of the depression on the sliding surface, the rotational friction between the cylinder and the column can be changed.

  In addition, a method in which powder is sprayed on the sliding surface instead of the pits and holes to partially form the matte surface is exemplified. Since a plurality of powders are dispersed and arranged on the surface of the matte surface to form an uneven surface, the larger the area of the matte surface on the sliding surface, the higher the rotational friction can be. The smaller the overlapping area of the matte surface formed on the column and the cylinder, the larger the total area of the matte surface effective for the rotational friction on the sliding surface, so that the rotational friction between the column and the cylinder can be increased.

  In addition, a method of attaching a tape having a low coefficient of friction instead of the depression or the hole is exemplified. On the sliding surface, the smaller the overlapping area of the tape attached to the pillar and the cylinder of the support portion, the larger the total area effective for the rotational friction of the tape attached to the sliding surface, so the rotational friction between the pillar and the cylinder Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C7, the pillar-shaped support portion includes a first non-contact portion in which formation of an outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the cylindrical support portion includes an inner peripheral side surface. Is provided, and the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion are arranged so as to partially overlap in the radial direction in a state where the arm members are supported by each other. The gaming machine C8, wherein the overlapping area is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the extended state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the contracted state.

  Here, in order to change the rotational friction at the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member, for example, when forming a texture on the support portion, the surface shape is smoothed by the friction caused by the rotation of the support portion (planar). ) And there is a problem in durability. In addition, for example, when a tape with low friction is applied, there is a possibility that the tape may be peeled off due to rotation of the support portion, and there is a problem in durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C7, the support portion formed in a columnar shape has a first non-contact portion in which the formation of the outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The formed supporting portion includes a second non-contact portion in which formation of the inner peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion do not contact each other. The area where the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion overlap in the radial direction is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the extended state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the contracted state.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the contracted state of the wiring auxiliary member is compared with the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

  Since the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion can be easily manufactured in the same shape by manufacturing a mold, it is necessary to change the rotational friction of the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member. It can be easily achieved.

  As the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion, a dent formed in the sliding surface of the support portion, a hole formed in the slide surface of the support portion, and the like are exemplified.

  In the gaming machines C2 to C8, a front locking member detachably fixed to the connecting rod portion is provided, and the connecting rod portion is formed by a pair of side wall portions juxtaposed along a longitudinal direction. The gaming machine C9, wherein the locking member is detachably fixed to an end portion in the short direction of one of the side wall portions and is formed so as to protrude toward the other side wall portion.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side walls arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and one of the pair of side walls is formed. And a front locking member which is detachably fixed to the short-side end of the side wall of the second member and protrudes toward the other side wall together with the flow.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the wiring is prevented from dropping off from the connecting rod when the front locking portion is attached, and the wiring is connected when the front locking portion is removed. It can be easily pulled out from.

  Thus, when the moving member operates, the front locking portion is attached to prevent the wiring from falling off, and when the moving member is stopped (for example, at the time of maintenance), the front locking portion is removed to facilitate replacement of the wiring. be able to.

  In the gaming machine C9, the front locking member includes at least one pair of arms, and when the front locking member is fixed to the one side wall, the one side wall is connected to the pair of arms. The gaming machine C10, which is sandwiched between arms and the one side wall includes a fitting recess formed as a recess into which the arm can be fitted.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, one of the side walls is sandwiched between the arms of the front locking member, and the arms are fitted into the fitting recesses at that time, so that the front locking is achieved. The sliding movement of the member in the longitudinal direction of the one side wall can be suppressed. This can prevent the front locking member from being displaced with respect to the side wall.

  As a method for preventing the front locking member from coming off from the side wall portion, the arm portion of the front locking member is extended beyond the length in the width direction of the side wall portion, and is opposed to the extended end portion. A method is provided in which a protruding portion is provided protruding toward the arm portion, and the protruding portion is hooked on the side wall portion to prevent the arm from coming off. In addition, a hook-shaped retaining portion for pressing the front locking member from the side wall portion in a direction opposite to the pull-out direction is formed, and a method of retaining the hook by hooking the retaining portion on the front locking member, etc. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C10, the pair of arms are formed in a cylindrical shape, and the fitting dent is formed as a dent extending in a semicircular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the arm is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess is formed in a semicircular cross section, so that one side wall is sandwiched between the pair of arms. When the arm portion is fitted into the fitting recess, the center of the arm portion is brought closer to the center of the fitting recess, so that the positioning when the front locking member is mounted on the one side wall portion can be facilitated. Therefore, the time required for mounting can be reduced.

  The gaming machine C12 according to any one of the gaming machines C2 to C11, wherein the wiring auxiliary member includes a position shift suppressing unit that suppresses a position shift of the wiring along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C11, the wiring auxiliary member includes the position shift suppressing unit that suppresses the position shift of the wiring along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. Wiring can be suppressed from being worn by rubbing against the wiring auxiliary member.

  In addition, as the position shift suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring assisting member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of walls, a depression formed on a side surface arranged to face the wiring is exemplified. In this case, for example, the pair of connecting rods are rotated in the direction in which they are opened by the support, and the distance between the ends of the pair of connecting rods on the side of the support (the distance around the support in the circumferential direction) is reduced. When the length of the wiring that goes around is excessive, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. That is, by allowing the excess of the length of the wiring wrapping around the support portion to be accommodated in the recess formed on the side face arranged opposite to the wiring and absorbing it, the wiring is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as the displacement suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wire between the pair of walls, the gap formed by the opposed side surfaces of the pair of walls and the wire is sandwiched has a curved shape or A portion formed in a bent shape is exemplified. For example, a case where a gap in which a wiring is sandwiched is formed in an S shape, a rectangular wave shape, or a U shape is exemplified.

  In this case, compared with the case where the gap formed by the pair of wall portions is formed in a straight line, when the wiring moves in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions, the inner side surface of the pair of wall portions and the wiring are displaced. Since the number of contact points can be increased, the resistance applied to the wiring can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wiring from moving in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions.

  In addition, as the position shift suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of walls, the distance between the pair of walls near the support portion is reduced to about the same as the thickness of the wiring. The part to be performed is exemplified. In this case, for example, when the wiring auxiliary member is rotated by the support portion, even if the wiring moves in the radial direction of the support portion, the distance between the pair of wall portions near the support portion is reduced to about the same as the thickness of the wiring. Therefore, the wiring can be held between the pair of wall portions near the support portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being displaced at the intermediate portion of the wiring auxiliary member.

  Further, as the position shift suppressing part, for example, when the connecting rod part of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of walls, a part protruding from the inner surface of one wall is exemplified. In this case, by hooking the protruding portion on the wiring, the resistance between the wiring and the connecting rod portion can be increased, and the wiring can be prevented from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, and the displacement suppressing portion projects from the one side wall portion to the other side wall portion. A gaming machine C13 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, and the displacement suppressing portion is formed from one side wall portion to the other. Is formed so as to protrude toward the side wall portion, a portion where the wiring is hooked on the inner side surfaces of the pair of side wall portions can be formed, and the displacement of the wiring in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine C14, wherein in the gaming machine C13, the misalignment suppressing portions are continuously provided along a longitudinal direction of the side wall portions, and are formed alternately on a pair of the side wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C13, the positional deviation suppressing portions are continuously provided along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portions and are alternately formed on the pair of side wall portions. The wiring can be more easily hooked on the displacement suppressing portion than in the case where the displacement suppressing portion is formed on the wiring.

  In the gaming machine C13 or C14, an interval between the displacement suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed to be smaller than a thickness of the wiring, and the displacement suppressing portion is elastically deformed in a direction away from the other side wall portion. A gaming machine C15 characterized by being enabled.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C13 or C14, the gap between the positional deviation suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the positional deviation suppressing portion is separated from the other side wall portion. Is elastically deformable in the direction in which the wire is inserted between the position shift suppressing portion and the other side wall portion, the position shift suppressing portion is elastically deformed, and the wiring recovers by the elastic recovery force. It can be sandwiched between the displacement suppressing portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wiring from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C12 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along a longitudinal direction, and the position shift suppressing portion is provided near the support portion of the pair of side wall portions. Is formed, a gaming machine C16.

  According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C15, the connecting rod portion is provided with a pair of side walls arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and a support portion of the pair of side walls is provided. A misregistration suppressing part is formed in the vicinity.

  In this case, the wiring provided around the supporting portion is prevented from being displaced in the vicinity of the supporting portion, which is particularly likely to be displaced when the pair of connecting rods are rotated, so that the wiring is disposed in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. It is possible to suppress displacement along the direction.

  Note that the misalignment suppressing portion may be formed by widening the formation interval between the pair of side wall portions near the support portion. The wiring can be curved at the portion where the formation interval between the pair of side wall portions is widened. Therefore, when the pair of connecting rods rotate, the wiring slackens in the vicinity of the support part, and even if the wiring is likely to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod, the wiring is curved by the displacement suppressing part. Thus, the slack of the wiring near the support portion can be absorbed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the pair of side wall portions, and it is possible to suppress the abrasion of the wiring, thereby improving the durability of the wiring.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C16, of the pair of arm members supported by each other, the one arm member is extended toward the other arm member, and the support portion is viewed in the axial direction. A gaming machine C17, comprising: an extended portion overlapping the other arm member, wherein the extended portion is formed so as to be able to abut on the other arm member in the axial direction of the support portion.

  According to the gaming machine C17, the extending portion extending from one arm member to the other arm member overlaps with the other arm member when viewed in the axial direction of the support portion, and the other arm member extends in the axial direction of the support portion. It is formed so as to be able to contact the arm member.

  In this case, if one of the arm members is twisted in a direction to bring the extending portion closer to the other arm member, the extending portion comes into contact with the other arm member, and the deformation resistance of the one arm member increases.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C16, one of the arm members is deformed in a manner to be twisted in a direction in which the extending portion approaches the other arm member. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wiring provided along the arm member from being twisted and deformed. Thereby, the durability of the wiring can be ensured.

<One example of a technical idea for preventing a position of a pair of arms of a member that rotates by a parallel link>
A base plate, a pair of arm members having one end pivotally supported by the base plate, and the other end of the pair of arm members being parallel to the pivot direction of the one end. A movable member pivotally supported by a shaft and formed to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a driving force of the movable member And a driving device that generates a parallel link, in the gaming machine in which the pair of arm members form a parallel link, one arm member of the pair of arm members is disposed on a side surface in the swing axis direction. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a bridging member, the bridging member being formed to be able to abut on a side surface of the other arm member of the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a moving member formed to be movable by being swung by a parallel link (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that the pair of arm members forming the parallel link may be displaced in the direction of the swing axis during the rotation of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the bridging member fixed to the side surface of the one arm member in the swing axis direction is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the other arm member in the swing axis direction. . In this case, since the movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction can be prevented by the bridge member, the pair of arm members can be prevented from being displaced in the swing axis direction.

  In the gaming machine D1, the bridging member always includes a side surface of the other arm member in the swing axis direction and the swing axis thereof while the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine D2 comprising an overlapping portion overlapping in a direction view.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the bridge member is always formed with an overlapping portion, so that the other arm member can always contact the bridge member. Can be reliably prevented from being displaced in the swing axis direction.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the driving device includes a transmission gear that transmits a driving force to the one arm member, and the one end of the one arm member has a swing shaft at one end thereof. A portion where gear teeth are formed in an arc shape centered on the transmission swing axis, which includes a passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear, and which is disposed to face the base member of the one arm member. A gaming machine D3, wherein a side surface and the transmission gear are formed so as to be in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, a transmission gear is arranged between one arm member and the base member, and a side surface of the one arm member that is arranged to face the base member, Since the transmission gear can be brought into contact with the transmission gear, it is possible to prevent one end of the one arm member from being displaced (posture change) in the swing axis direction.

  Further, a side surface of the one arm member, which is opposed to the base member at one end, is brought into contact with the transmission gear, and the transmission gear is rotated, so that one end of the one arm member becomes the base member. The swing resistance of one of the arm members can be reduced as compared with the case where the arm members are in contact with each other. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both prevention of displacement of one arm member in the swing axis direction and reduction of the swing resistance.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the one arm member is formed with an area smaller than the area of the one end of the one arm member, and is provided between the one arm member and the base member. A gaming machine D4 comprising an area member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the contact area between the base member and one of the arm members is reduced by the small area member, so that the swing of one of the arm members is reduced. Motion resistance is reduced. Thereby, the driving force of the driving device can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D4, the small-area member is formed from a shape including a longitudinal direction and a short direction formed shorter than the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is defined as the one end of the one arm member. A gaming machine D5 fixed to the one arm member in a posture along a direction connecting the other end.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D4, the small-area member has one arm in a posture along the longitudinal direction in a direction connecting one end and the other end of one arm member. Since the contact area between the base member and the small-area member fixed along the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the one arm member is increased, the other end of the one arm member is Can move closer to or away from the base member to improve the resistance to deformation of one of the arm members.

  Further, by making the small area member a shape having a longitudinal direction and a short direction, it is possible to reduce the contact area between one arm member and the base member as compared with a case where the small area member is a circle having a large diameter. Can be.

  In the gaming machine D5, the external shape of the small-area member has an irregular shape including a main body circle formed by the short-side diameter and a line drawn from the longitudinal end to the main body circle. A straight line connecting the transmission swing axis of the one arm member and the rotation axis of the transmission gear always intersects with the external part of the main body circle among the external parts of the small area member. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the outer shape of the main body circle formed by the diameter of the small area member in the short direction is changed by the rotation of the transmission swing shaft and the transmission gear of one arm member. Since it always intersects with the straight line connecting the axes, even if the distance between the axes of the small area member and the transmission gear is the same, the straight line connecting those axes extends from the longitudinal end of the small area member to the body circle. As compared with the case where the line intersects with the line to be drawn, the area of contact between the transmission gear and the side surface of the one arm member on the base member side can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent one arm member from being displaced in the swing axis direction.

  In any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the passive gear portion extends in the axial direction along the side surface opposite to the transmission gear among the swinging axial side surfaces, and the gear teeth of the passive gear portion are The transmission gear is formed in a two-stage gear shape in which gears are stacked in two stages, and a first gear portion of a first stage includes the one arm member and the base. A second gear portion of a second stage is formed between the passive gear portion and the second gear portion so as to be able to abut on the umbrella portion in the rotation axis direction of the transmission gear. A gaming machine D7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the transmission gear is formed by a two-stage gear, and the first gear portion of the two-stage gear is a base member of one arm member. The second gear portion can contact the umbrella portion of the passive gear portion, so that the number of contact portions between the transmission gear and one of the arm members can be increased. Thereby, wobbling of one arm member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D7, the first position is a protruding position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and the umbrella portion is provided on the one arm member in a radial direction of the passive gear portion. A supporting portion extending beyond a center distance between a transmission swinging shaft and a rotating shaft of the transmitting member, the supporting portion including the transmitting gear in a state where the moving member is disposed at the extended position. A gaming machine D8 formed so as to be able to abut on the axial side surface of the second gear portion.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, in a state where the moving member is arranged at the extended position and the movement in the swing axis direction is most likely to occur, the support portion is provided to the second gear portion of the transmission gear. Since it is formed so as to be able to abut, the abutment can suppress the movement of one arm member in the swing axis direction.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridging member is supported by the one arm member at two points, and a straight line connecting the supporting points is greater than 0 degree and 90 degrees with the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. A gaming machine D9, which forms a smaller predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridging member is supported at two points by one arm member, and a straight line connecting the supporting points is formed in the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. And a predetermined angle larger than 0 degree and smaller than 90 degrees, so that the load applied to one arm member due to the contact between the other arm member and the bridging member is rotated around the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. It can be divided into a twisting direction, which is a direction, and a bending direction in which one arm member falls down in the longitudinal direction. Thus, the degree of deformation of one arm member in one direction can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the bridging members are arranged in parallel in a pair in the longitudinal direction of the one arm member, and the pair of bridging members have substantially the same separation distance from the one arm member. And the one bridging member of the pair of bridging members, which is closer to the one end of the one arm member, is closer to the other end of the one arm member. The gaming machine D10, wherein deformation resistance is formed to be greater than that of the other bridge member on the side.

  According to the gaming machine D10, the bridging members are arranged in a pair in the longitudinal direction of the one arm member, and one of the bridging members is compared with the other bridging member. As a result, a large deformation resistance is formed. That is, one of the bridging members disposed closer to the base member is more likely to be deformed than the other bridging member disposed closer to the moving member.

  The bending deformation of the other arm member is such that the other end supported by the moving member is moved in the axial direction by the weight of the moving member, with one end supported by the base member as an axis. It is caused by things. Therefore, in the case where the pair of bridging members are formed so that the separation distance from one arm member is substantially equal, the other arm member and the other bridging member are compared with the one bridging member. Contact early.

  Here, when the deformation resistance of the other bridging member is as large as the deformation resistance of one bridging member, a situation occurs in which only the other bridging member receives the load from the other arm member alone, The durability of the bridge member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the other bridge member has a smaller deformation resistance than the one bridge member, and the other arm member. Since the other bridge member is deformed before abuts against one bridge member, the pair of bridge members can receive a load from the other arm member. Therefore, the load from the other arm member can be distributed to and shared by the pair of bridging members, so that the durability of the pair of bridging members can be improved.

  In addition, as a method of reducing the deformation resistance of the other bridge member compared to the deformation resistance of one bridge member, different materials are used, and the material of the other bridge member is replaced with the material of the one bridge member. An example is a method using a material having a lower rigidity. Further, when the materials are the same, a method of reducing the sectional modulus of the other bridging member compared to the sectional modulus of one bridging member, or a method of forming a reinforcing rib on one bridging member Etc. are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D10, the bridging member is a columnar portion that is inserted into the one arm member, and is fixed to the one arm member, and is extended adjacent to the fixing portion. And a detent pin portion that abuts on the one arm member at the seat surface in the direction in which the one of the arm members extends. The one of the bridging members is such that the fixing portion has the detent pin portion. And the other bridging member is characterized in that the fixing portion is disposed closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion. Gaming machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, the bridging member includes the fixing portion fixed to the one arm member, and the detent pin portion that comes into contact with the one arm member on the seat surface.

  In one of the bridging members, the fixing portion is disposed farther away from the other arm member than the detent pin portion (the detent pin portion is disposed between the fixing portion and the other arm member). . Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with one of the bridging members and the one bridging member is turned up from the fixed portion as a starting point, the detent pin portion separates from the one of the arm members.

  On the other hand, in the other bridging member, the fixed portion is disposed closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion (the fixed portion is disposed between the detent pin portion and the other arm member). Established). Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with the other bridging member and the other bridging member is turned up from the fixed portion as a starting point, the seat surface of the detent pin portion moves in a direction pressed against the one arm member. .

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10, the seating surface of the detent pin portion is pressed against one of the arm members and the deformation resistance is increased, so that the gaming machine D11 is compared with the one bridge member. The other bridging member can be more difficult to turn up.

  Here, "turning up" means that the bridging member receives a force from the other arm member and peels off from the one arm member.

  In the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridging member is a columnar portion that is inserted into the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion that is fixed to the one arm member. A game wherein a depth of embedding the fixing portion of the other bridging member in the one arm member is deeper than a depth of embedding the fixing portion in the one arm member. Machine D12.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridging member includes a fixing portion to be fixed to one arm member, the embedded depth of the fixing portion into one arm member, Since the other bridging member is deeper than one bridging member, the other bridging member can be firmly fixed to one arm member as compared to one bridging member. The other bridging member can be less likely to be turned up than the bridging member.

  In any of the gaming machines D10 to D12, the bridging member is a columnar portion that is inserted into the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion that is fixed to the one arm member. The length of the fixing portion of the one bridging member projecting from the side surface of the one arm member compared to the length of the fixing portion protruding from the side surface of the one arm member. Is a shorter gaming machine D13.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D10 to D12, the bridging member includes a fixing portion, and after the fixing portion is fixed to one arm member, the fixing portion is connected to one of the arm members. Since the length of the overhang from the arm member is shorter than that of one bridge member, the length of the other bridge member is shorter than that of the other bridge member. The deformation resistance can be increased. Therefore, the other bridging member can be less likely to be turned up than the one bridging member.

  In any of the gaming machines D10 to D13, the other in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member, as compared with the section modulus of the one bridge member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member The gaming machine D14, wherein the cross-sectional modulus of the bridging member is formed larger.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D10 to D13, compared with the cross-sectional coefficient of one bridge member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member, Since the cross-sectional modulus of the other bridge member in the direction of the applied load is formed to be larger, the difference in shape between the one bridge member and the other bridge member reduces the deformation resistance of one bridge member. In comparison, the deformation resistance of the other bridge member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D14, the bridging member includes a projecting portion projecting from a side surface that is in contact with the other arm member, and the projecting portion is configured such that the moving member is the first member. When it is arranged at one position, it can contact with the other arm member, and when it is arranged at the second position, it cannot contact with the other arm member. A gaming machine D15.

  According to the gaming machine D15, the protruding portion protrudes from the bridge member. The projecting portion is capable of abutting on the other arm member when the moving member is located at the first position, and abutting on the other arm member when the moving member is located at the second position. It is impossible.

  Thereby, according to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D14, when the moving member is disposed at the first position, the distance between the bridge member and the other arm member is increased. The other arm member and the bridging member can be brought into contact with each other from within the small deformation of the other arm member in the swing axis direction. On the other hand, when the moving member is disposed at the second position, the distance between the bridging member and the other arm member is ensured to be large, and the resistance when the moving member is moved from the second position is increased. Can be suppressed.

  For example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the moving amount of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is large, while the moving member is arranged at the second position. Is effective when the amount of movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is negligibly small. That is, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, a load is applied from the moving member in a direction of bending the other arm member along the longitudinal direction, while the moving member is arranged at the second position. This is effective when a load is applied in the direction of twisting the other arm member along the lateral direction from the moving member.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the width of the bridge member at a portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member is smaller than the width of the bridge member at a portion overlapping the side surface of the one arm member. A gaming machine D16 characterized by being formed thinner.

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15, compared to the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of one arm member, the portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member Since the width of the bridging member at is smaller than that of the other, the other arm member abuts on the bridging member, and when the bridging member is deformed, the one arm member and the other arm member are continuously provided. It is possible to suppress that the bridging member is twisted about the direction of rotation.

  That is, the deformation of the bridging member can be easily limited to the bending deformation along the direction in which the one arm member and the other arm member are continuously provided. Therefore, for example, when forming a portion for improving the deformation resistance of the bridging member against bending and torsion, the arrangement can be limited to a portion where the resistance to the bending deformation of the bridging member is increased, and The configuration of the member can be simplified.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D16, when the moving member is disposed in at least one of the first position or the second position, the moving member is supported above the base member, and the center of gravity of the moving member Is formed at a position closer to the other arm member than the one arm member, and at a position separated from the other arm member on the bridging member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. A gaming machine D17.

  According to the gaming machine D17, the center of gravity of the moving member is located closer to the other arm member than the one arm member, and the other arm member is positioned on the bridge member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. It is formed at a position apart from. Therefore, when the moving member is supported above the base member, the weight of the moving member is applied more to the other arm member than to the one arm member. In this case, the other arm member can be more easily bent than one arm member.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D16, when the pair of arm members bend due to the weight of the moving member, the other arm member abuts on the bridge member. This can make it easier for one arm member to bend toward the bridging member side than the other arm member, thereby suppressing the occurrence of displacement of the pair of arm members.

<An example of the technical concept of irradiating light from outside the game area to the inside of the game area>
A gaming machine comprising: a rail member that forms an outer frame of a game area; and an irradiation device that is provided outside the rail member and irradiates light inside the rail member. The game machine E1 characterized in that light emitted from the device travels on the back side of the rail member.

  There is a gaming machine which is provided inside the game area in front view and irradiates light from the back side of the game area, and performs effects using the irradiation apparatus (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-081031). . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to prevent the irradiation device such as an LED from being viewed from the front in the inside of the game area, a cover member for blindfold is provided on the front of the irradiation device. In addition, since it is necessary to paint the board surface, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, an irradiation device for irradiating light to the inside of the game area through the back side of the rail member forming the outer frame of the game area is disposed outside the rail member, Since it is possible to prevent an illuminating device such as an LED from being visible in the game area, the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area can be improved.

  By arranging the irradiation device outside the game area on the back side of a plate member such as an outer edge member, the irradiation device can be made invisible from the front.

  In the gaming machine E1, the light radiated from the irradiation device is radiated toward a special winning opening where the ball wins, and the traveling direction of the light radiated from the irradiating device is directed to the front side at the outer edge of the large winning opening. A gaming machine E2, wherein a direction change portion for changing the direction of the game machine is formed.

  Here, when the irradiation device is disposed outside the rail member, in order to direct the light to be irradiated to the player side, it is necessary to direct the direction of the light of the irradiation device to the direction toward the front side, Since the depth in the front-back direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device in the direction toward the front side. Therefore, a changing member that changes the traveling direction toward the front side by reflecting the light emitted from the irradiation device is required, and the changing member is disposed inside the game area. In this case, in order to prevent the changing member from being seen in a front view, it may be necessary to provide a cover member for blindfolding in front of the changing member or to paint the board surface. There is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is irradiated toward the special winning opening, and the outer edge of the large winning opening is irradiated from the irradiation device. A direction change portion that changes the traveling direction of light toward the front side is formed, but the outer edge of the big winning opening is a part that the player aims at to win the ball, and it can be shown barely in front view Since it is a possible portion, a cover member or the like for blindfolding can be dispensed with, and the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area can be improved.

  As a mode in which the direction change portion is formed on the outer edge of the special winning opening, the wall surface of the opening of the special winning opening is formed to be inclined at an angle capable of reflecting light emitted from the irradiation device toward the front side. And an upper cover member for opening and closing the special winning opening is formed to be inclined at an angle capable of reflecting the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the front side, and the like.

  In the gaming machine E2, it is possible to form a closed state for closing the flow path of the ball to the special winning opening and an open state for opening the flow path of the ball to the special winning opening, and to set the outer edge of the special winning opening. An upper lid member to be formed, the upper lid member includes the direction change portion, and the upper lid member forms the closed state or the open state, and in one of the states, the direction change portion includes A gaming machine E3 to which light emitted from an irradiation device reaches.

  Here, it is difficult to arrange an irradiating device such as an LED on the upper lid member provided in the special winning opening because the upper lid member becomes large. Therefore, it was difficult to make the upper lid member emit light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, the direction change portion that directs the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the front side is different from the closed state and the opened state of the special winning opening. Is formed on the upper lid member forming the outer edge of the special winning opening, so that the player can visually recognize that the direction change portion of the upper lid member emits light, and suppresses an increase in the size of the upper lid member. It is possible to improve the performance of the upper cover member as a production part.

  In addition, since the state of the upper lid member is switched, whether or not light reaches the direction change part changes. Therefore, it is confirmed whether or not the direction change part of the upper lid member is visually recognized as if emitting light. This makes it possible to confirm whether the winning opening is open or closed. This makes it easy to confirm the state of the special winning opening.

  In addition, as an aspect in which whether or not light reaches the direction changing portion by switching the state of the upper lid member, a mode in which a member capable of shielding light before reaching the direction changing portion is provided, A mode in which the output of the irradiation device is turned on / off in accordance with the switching of the state of the upper lid member, or the like is exemplified.

  Examples of the form of forming the upper lid member include a form in which a sliding operation is performed in the front-rear direction of the game area, and a form in which a pair of long plate members opposed to each other swings about axes parallel to the front-rear direction.

  The gaming machine E3 includes a shielding portion formed so as to be able to shield light emitted from the irradiation device, and is illuminated from the irradiation device when the special winning opening forms one of the open state or the closed state. When the light reaches the direction change portion and the special winning opening forms the other of the open state and the closed state, light emitted from the irradiation device toward the direction change portion is blocked by the shielding portion. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the shielding portion is formed in a manner capable of shielding the light emitted from the irradiating device, and depends on whether the special winning opening is closed or opened. Whether the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the direction change portion reaches the direction change portion, or whether the light does not reach the direction change portion by disposing the shielding portion between the irradiation device and the direction change portion. Can be changed, so that the state in which the direction change portion of the upper lid member is visually recognized as if it emits light can be changed only by the operation required to continue the game on the upper lid member. Therefore, the upper lid member can be used for both the role of controlling the passage of the ball to the special winning opening and the role of performing the effect by the light emitted from the irradiation device.

  In addition, as a shielding part, the metal rail member which divides a game area | region, the painting part painted on the board surface of a game board, the decorative board extended from the board surface of a game board to the front side, etc. are illustrated. That is, when the shielding portion is formed from the rail member, the rail member is used for both the purpose of forming the outer frame of the game area and the purpose as the shielding portion.

  In the gaming machine E3 or E4, a front plate member is provided on the front side of the special winning opening, and the front plate member reaches the direction change portion and receives light whose traveling direction has changed. The gaming machine E5, which is formed so as to cover a large winning opening in a front view, and wherein the direction change portion focuses light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member.

  Here, there is a gaming machine in which a front plate member is disposed in front of the special winning opening, and the front plate member covers the special winning opening in a front view. In such a gaming machine, the inside of the special winning opening can be suppressed from being visually recognized, and the degree of freedom in designing the inside of the special winning opening can be improved. On the other hand, in this case, since the light emitted from the irradiation device to the special winning opening is visually recognized through the front plate member, it is necessary to increase the intensity of the light in order to maintain the effect of the light emitted from the irradiation device. However, there is a problem that usable irradiation devices are limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3 or E4, the direction changing unit that changes the traveling direction of the light toward the front plate member collects light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member. Since the light is emitted, the intensity of the light reaching the predetermined portion of the front plate member can be increased without changing the irradiation device.

  In addition, as a mode of condensing light, a mode in which the direction change portion is formed in a U shape and the side facing the front plate member is open, or a direction change portion is formed in a parabolic shape and the side facing the front plate member is open And the like.

  In any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, when the special winning opening forms the open state, light emitted from the irradiation device reaches the direction changing portion, and a ball winning the special winning opening is A gaming machine E6, wherein the gaming machine E6 blocks light emitted from the irradiation device from reaching the direction change portion by crossing light emitted from the irradiation device.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, when the large winning opening is opened, the light emitted from the irradiation device reaches the direction changing portion, and the large winning opening is obtained. The ball that wins the game crosses the light emitted from the irradiation device, thereby blocking the light emitted from the irradiation device from reaching the direction change portion, so that the direction change portion is viewed brightly or darkly. , It can be confirmed that the ball has won the big winning opening. Thereby, for example, even when the large winning opening is made invisible in a front view, it is possible to confirm that the ball has won the large winning opening by visually recognizing the light emitted from the irradiation device. There is no need to look into the winning opening diagonally from above, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

  Here, for example, when the irradiation direction of light faces the flowing direction of the sphere, when one ball wins in the special winning opening, or when two or more consecutive winnings are made, the light is blocked by the first ball. It is difficult to determine the number of winning balls by light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, since the ball crosses the light emitted from the irradiation device, the ball may face the light or the ball may not emit light. Unlike the case of flowing down along the irradiation direction of, the light emitted from the irradiation device is blocked for each ball won in the special winning opening. Accordingly, even when a ball is successively placed at the special winning opening, the light can be blocked for each ball, and the number of the balls that have won the special winning opening can be determined by the light.

  Also, since the sphere crosses the light, the ball that wins the grand prize opening is compared with the case where the flowing direction of the ball and the traveling direction of the light face each other or the case where the ball flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period in which the light is shielded can be shortened, and the period in which the direction change portion is viewed bright can be lengthened, so that the performance capability of the direction change portion can be secured.

  The gaming machine E6 further includes a front plate member that is provided in front of the special winning opening and that reaches the direction change portion and to which light whose traveling direction has changed reaches, the direction change portion includes the front plate. The gaming machine E7, wherein light is focused on a predetermined portion of the member, and the irradiating device is formed in such a manner as to irradiate light from a plurality of locations, and the sphere individually traverses the light emitted from each of the locations. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the front plate member is provided on the front side of the big winning opening, and reaches the direction change portion and receives light whose traveling direction has changed, Since the direction changing portion focuses light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member, for example, when light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from the irradiation device, the light of the actually irradiated color and the light of each color are combined. The light of the different colors can be visually recognized through the front plate member.

  Further, the irradiation device is formed in such a manner as to irradiate light from a plurality of locations, and the spheres individually traverse the light radiated from each location. Can be changed.

  For example, a case is considered in which the irradiation device includes a pair of locations for irradiating light, and one location emits “blue” light and the other location emits “red” light. In this case, the light condensed on the front plate member can be visually recognized as “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red”.

  Here, when the sphere flows down in such a manner as to cross the light irradiated from one location and shields the light, the light of “blue” color is blocked, so the “red” color is applied to the front plate member. Only the light of is visible.

  On the other hand, when the sphere flows down in such a manner as to cross the light irradiated from the other part and shields the light, the “red” light is blocked, so the “blue” color is applied to the front plate member. Only light is visible.

  As described above, the manner in which light is visually recognized by the front plate member can be changed depending on where the sphere blocks light emitted. Since the change in the light mode is caused by a ball flowing down the game area along a random route while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the light mode can be generated at random timing. That is, as compared with a case where the change of the mode of the light emitted from the irradiation device is caused by electronic control, an effect with more randomness can be performed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E2 to E7, the special winning opening is provided below the center of the gaming area, and a lower edge of the rail member forms an opening lower side of the special winning opening. Machine E8.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a special winning opening is provided below a liquid crystal display device (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the out port is formed at the lower edge of the gaming area, and the liquid crystal display device is formed above the large winning port arranged thereabove. However, there is a problem in that the driving device does not lower the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device, which hinders an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, the lower edge of the rail member forms the lower side of the opening of the special winning opening. In this case, by forming the opening on the basis of the lowermost point of the rail member, both left and right ends of the opening can be formed to protrude downward from the game area, and compared to a case where the lower side of the opening is formed by a straight line, The big winning opening can be formed in a small space.

  In addition, since the special winning opening is provided in a region including the lower edge of the rail member, which is a place where the out opening is generally provided, the position of the driving device formed on the back of the special winning opening is lowered. , Whereby the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered.

  In the gaming machine E8, a first out port disposed on one side in the left-right direction of the special winning opening to discharge a ball out of the game area, and a ball disposed on the other side in the left-right direction of the special winning opening, A second out port for discharging outside the area, a closed state disposed above the special winning opening and closing a flow path of the ball to the special winning opening, and a flow path of the ball to the special winning opening. An upper lid member capable of forming an open state to be opened, wherein upper sides of the first out port and the second out port are formed above an upper side surface of an end of the upper lid member, and the first The lower side of the out opening and the second out opening is formed below the upper side surface of the end of the upper cover member, so that the first out port extends along the upper side surface of the upper cover member in the closed state of the special winning opening. That the ball can flow down to the mouth or the second out mouth Game machine E9 to butterflies.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E8, the upper sides of the first out port and the second out port are formed above the upper side surface of the end of the upper lid member, and the first out port and the second out port are formed. Since the lower side of the out opening is formed below the upper side surface of the end of the upper lid member, the upper lid member can be discharged from the first out port or the second out port while discharging the ball. And it can be lowered to the same position as the second out port.

  In the gaming machine E9, the upper surface of the upper lid member is formed to have a shape inclined downward in both left and right directions.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, since the upper surface of the upper lid member is formed to be inclined downward in both the left and right directions, it is possible to suppress the vertical width of the left and right ends of the special winning opening. it can. As a result, the nail formed in the game area and causing the ball to flow toward the special winning opening can be translated downward, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered.

  The gaming machine E11, wherein in the gaming machine E9 or E10, the upper lid member is formed with a plurality of ribs protruding from a lower surface.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the rib is formed on the lower surface of the upper lid member to increase the rigidity of the upper lid member and prevent the upper lid member from falling down due to the weight of the ball. can do.

  In the gaming machine E11, among the plurality of ribs, the rib formed inside the special winning opening may be formed on the back side of the game area when the upper lid member forms the closed state. A gaming machine E12 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E11, the rib formed inside the big winning opening is formed on the back side of the gaming area in a state where the upper lid member is in the closed state, so that the ball is formed. The ball flows down below the upper lid member, and a sufficient vertical width in which the ball is arranged on the front side of the special winning opening can be secured. That is, interference between the rib and the sphere can be prevented.

  In any of the gaming machines E9 to E12, before the ball flowing down to the first out port or the second out port reaches the first out port or the second out port, the direction of the ball is changed to the first out port or the second out port. A gaming machine E13 including a ball-direction adjusting unit for directing the ball in the opening direction of the 1-out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines E9 to E12, the ball direction is adjusted by the ball direction adjustment unit in the opening direction of the first out port or the second out port. It can be made easier to discharge to the first outlet or the second outlet. Thereby, since the opening width of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed, when the special winning opening, the first out port, and the second out port are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, the arrangement positions thereof are changed. It can be lowered below the game area.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a direction change portion that changes a traveling direction of light emitted from the irradiation device to a direction toward a front side, and a board surface forming a back surface of the game area is formed of a transparent resin, and the direction change is performed. The gaming machine E14, wherein the portion is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface.

  Here, when the irradiation device is disposed outside the rail member, in order to direct the light to be irradiated to the player side, it is necessary to direct the direction of the light of the irradiation device to the direction toward the front side, Since the depth in the front-back direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device in the direction toward the front side. Therefore, a changing member that changes the traveling direction toward the front side by reflecting the light emitted from the irradiation device is required, and the changing member is disposed inside the game area. In this case, in order to prevent the changing member from being seen in a front view, it may be necessary to provide a cover member for blindfolding in front of the changing member or to paint the board surface. There is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the board surface forming the back surface of the gaming area is formed of a transparent resin, and the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device is directed to the front side. Since the direction change portion that changes in the direction is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface, it is inconspicuous even when the direction change portion is barely seen in front view, affecting the decoration of the game area. Can be reduced. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area can be improved.

  In addition, as a mode in which the direction changing portion is formed on the board surface, a mode in which the board surface is cut, a mode in which the board surface is drilled, a mode in which a nail is screwed into the board surface, and a direction changing portion in the resin mold of the board surface. For example, a method of forming a concave portion in a molded article by forming a protrusion corresponding to the above-mentioned method is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine E14, light emitted from the irradiating device, the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the direction changing unit is irradiated from below onto a member protruding from the board surface. Gaming machine E15.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E13, the light emitted from the irradiation device, the light of which the traveling direction is changed by the direction changing unit, is applied from below to a member protruding from the board surface. Since the illumination is performed, the shadow formed below the member protruding from the board surface can be brightened by the light emitted from the irradiation device by the illumination of the hall. This makes it possible to improve the performance of the area below the member protruding from the board, and to make it easier to see the ball when the ball passes through the area below the member protruding from the board. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden felt by the player due to the difficulty in seeing the ball.

  In addition, as a member protruded from the board surface, a nail, a windmill, a through gate, and the like are exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine F1 is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
<Means>
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is a gaming machine including a movable member formed so as to be movable and wiring connected to the movable member, wherein one end is connected to the movable member, and the other end is connected to the other. An end is connected to the rear case outside the liquid crystal display device, and further includes a wiring auxiliary member formed so as to be extendable and contractable, and the wiring is disposed along the wiring auxiliary member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of arm members, and the arm members include a long rod-shaped connecting rod portion and the connecting rod. A supporting portion formed at at least one end of the portion in a columnar or cylindrical shape having a shaft in a short direction of the connecting rod portion and rotatably supporting the arm members, and wrapping around the supporting portion. The wiring is arranged in the.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is the gaming machine according to the second technical concept, wherein the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side walls arranged side by side in a longitudinal direction, and the pair of side walls is vertically And the width of the lower side wall portion of the pair of side wall portions is longer than the width of the upper side wall portion formed above, and the width of at least one of the side wall portions is equal to the width of the wiring. Is made shorter than the width dimension.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the wiring of the gaming machine can be appropriately arranged.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, deformation of the wiring can be limited.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the wiring can be appropriately handled.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13,8013 Gaming board 61 Inner rail (rail member)
62 Outer rail (rail member)
65a Special winning opening (large winning opening)
81 3rd design display device (liquid crystal display device)
210 Back case 311c Spherical flow rib (sphere direction adjustment unit)
314 Out mouth (first out mouth, second out mouth)
320 Front plate member 321a Spherical flow rib (sphere direction adjustment unit)
331c Light irradiation device (irradiation device)
332 Moving top lid member (top lid member)
332a1f Front inclined side surface (direction change part)
332a3 Guide rib (part of rib)
332c center rib (part of rib)
410 body member (moving member, first moving member)
416 Shaft support (first support)
421 swing base member (part of second moving member)
421c Inserting shaft part (one end)
422 Decoration member (part of the second moving member)
423, 5423 Connecting member 423b Bent portion (intermediate portion)
423c shaft support rod (second support part)
423e slide shaft (other end)
424, 5424 Guide plate (base member)
424b, 4424b Guide hole (guide route)
430 Swing member (auxiliary member)
440 Leg member (part of slide mechanism)
460 Driving device 480, 9480 Wiring guide arm (wiring auxiliary member)
481, 9481 First guide arm (arm member, component)
481a Plate-shaped arm part (part of connecting rod part, side wall part, part of long part)
481a1 Notch (recess)
481b One side cylindrical part (support part)
481c Other cylindrical part (support part)
481c1 Large diameter part (second non-contact part)
481d Attached part (part of connecting rod part, side wall part, part of long part)
481d1 Arc-shaped attachment part (wall part)
481e Bottom part (part of connecting rod part, bottom part, part of long part)
481e2 Bottom of other side (bottom of shaft)
482, 9482 Second guide arm (arm member, component)
482a Plate arm (part of connecting rod part, side wall part, part of long part)
482a1 Arc-shaped plate (wall)
482a2 Notch (recess)
482b One side cylindrical part (support part)
482b1 Reduced diameter part (first non-contact part)
482c Other cylindrical part (support part)
482d Attached part (part of connecting rod part, side wall part, part of long part)
482e Bottom part (part of connecting rod part, bottom part, part of long part)
482e1 One side bottom (shaft bottom)
483 Third guide arm (arm member, component)
510, 3510 Base member (base plate)
520, 2520, 3520, 7520 Drive side arm member (arm member)
523 Gear part (passive gear part)
523a Umbrella part 525 Color member (small area member)
525a Body (Body circle)
528, 2528, 7528 Bridge member 528a, 7528a First bridge member (the other bridge member)
528a2 insertion part (fixed part)
528a3 Auxiliary projection (detent pin)
528a4 rib part (projection part)
528b, 7528b Second bridge member (one bridge member)
528b2 insertion part (fixed part)
528b3 Auxiliary projection (rotation pin)
528b4 rib part (projection part)
530, 7530 driven arm member (arm member)
540 Moving member 550 Driving device 553 Transmission gear 553a First gear portion 553b Second gear portion 3523b Overhang portion (support portion)
4424c Recessed part (braking part)
5425b2 Second inclined surface (braking unit)
6480 Wiring guide slide (wiring auxiliary member)
8013c Direction changing unit 8610 Light irradiation device (irradiation device)
9481d1 Fitting recess (fitting recess)
9481f Detachable front locking member (front locking member)
9481f2 Fitting arm (arm)
9481g Non-slip plate part (position shift suppression part)
9481h Other side auxiliary bottom (extended part)
9482f Overhanging front locking part (extended part)
9482g Non-slip plate part (position shift suppression part)
C color member (lid member)
N-rib part (positional deviation suppressing part , protruding part )
W wiring

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine including a movable moving member and wiring connected to the moving member,
A wiring auxiliary member having one end connected to the moving member,
The wiring is at least partially disposed along the wiring auxiliary member,
The wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of components,
Its constituent parts are a long long part,
A supporting portion formed at at least one end of the long portion and rotatably supporting the components,
At least a part of the long portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the long direction,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the side wall portions includes a projecting portion projecting toward the wiring.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images